Home

Dodge 2009 ND Dakota Automobile User Manual

Contents

1. 158 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 159 29 Traction Control 4 233 shee eden a5 es rA ES S 269 TOMO sr ao Seo arai tex an seam ae 84 108 158 392 VOIDE 22 223 4 49R oe V fedes iro A e Re RR 151 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 150 Loading Velle 2e 3 9 E SUE En ERI 3113 CAapaCues sa pappaa MEE Abas MOSH soe 313 438 INDEX M Locks Auto Unlock Child Protection Door Power Door Low Tire Pressure System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Lubrication Body Lumbar Support Maintenance Free Battery Maintenance General Maintenance Procedures Maintenance Schedule Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine Manual Service Map Reading Lights 400 423 Master Cylinder Brakes 372 Methanol 22a edm HES eR FESR ESS 301 Mini Irip Computer sed 3 43S Sure eae ead 167 MIOS V4 3E GREEN RP RR ER EUR RE 89 A tomate TORIO e osos de Paca Ee Mak eee 2 s 90 Electric Powered leen 90 Ou de amp eae ee ge E oes EROR eee EN SOS a UE 91 Rearview eee 89 WAMILY ue vesc Fu v bs soos d euer Exe eeu aa 92 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure SySten uo d cisma Ye a 291 Mopar DOLES 1A 4s o0s Soe eee Geese as es 352 422 MIBE EIBE eR 301 New Vehicle Break In Period 79 Occupant Restraints s Gobo tacky S beh eee gs 60 64 Occupant Restraints Sedan 38 56 57 60 63 Octane Ratin
2. 289 ROW IES 353349 9932994330 4 29442 5 290 pale Efe ou ode E us 2 9 dee bs UR ES 200 929 Specifications i ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 355 Speed Control Cruise Control 118 157 versetur MP Dm 150 Speedometer and Odometer a 9 edes oes 148 DIJEUO nee ERA eee ORG he a5 x RA IRE 243 Engine Fails to Start seas zac ome ne semi 244 Starting and Operating x oaa as eut EX RA 243 Slartine DEOGBOUTOS x socskocs d 65445 4596 8 doped 243 Steering POWER c r 258 259 TE CODE us 3 6 Gee E ey HE ES Oe 117 Wheel Tit 226465 2eaeeb ere eee ass LZ EEG IUIS ULLUILISLILLILULcOULIL CEeLLSGLILLL UOeLUL LEIoLLU PELIIAAGOGTeGGGBGUlc hpnG tnAe LIsLaux L ULGUGALLLADAAO OAGOGGGBSGBGBBGC6G DL JP 3 OP 7 EC Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Gold 2 45 sei eae eee hone oa Ge ee 222 vnl APT 134 388 Blonde VENCE x uos dera Rn Re done opos es Pose ai 29D vino dcc PU c pn 339 DUM FM D 127 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 53 Synthetic ENEIDE Ol oes ene pre ndr ees 357 TIDO 2s dieu Ha Sardo v acd e dod cdi d a ded 154 jii P a os eae te ee Oe OR 992 Telescoping Steering Column 117 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 229 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 150 327 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 73 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Theft System Security Alarm 2532 17 Tit Steen COMM etanscen ic RERSEAE ES H7 Time Dely Hea
3. 14 N A i a X 12 040506040 fe Compass Variance Map ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Leave the shift lever in PARK 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press and release the STEP button until Compass Variance and the current Variance Value displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the RESET button to increment the Variance Value by one one button press per update until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map NOTE The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 back to 1 The Default Variance is Zone 8 5 Press and release the STEP button to exit Press the STEP button if you wish to calibrate the compass manu ally Refer to Manual Compass Calibration Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC Press and release the STEP button to display the follow ing programmable features Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the RESET button while in this display selects English Spanish French German Italian or Dutch de pending on availability As you continue the displayed inform
4. PCTTITTT 39 Wipers Intermittent ss cesa seh Rn Rn ons 114 Windshield Defroster 82 227 233 SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10D41 126 AC 3rd Edition Printed in U S A
5. 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607492 022607497 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHRat 1 Downward Movement a comfortable position 2 Rearward Movement 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 1
6. AA 022607757 adhi 022607494 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mecha AHR In Reset Position pe NOTE 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the into the back decorative plastic half Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur wi
7. Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi Level Recirculated air is not allowed in Floor Mix or Defrost modes If the Recirculation button is depressed while in any of these modes the LED indicator will flash several times then go out Recirculation will be dis abled automatically is these modes are selected The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler 04560755 temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures NOTE The ir conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at th
8. Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Press and release the STEP button until Calibrate Compass Yes displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the RESET button and the CAL indicator will quit flashing 5 Drive the vehicle slowly under 5 mph 8 km h completing one or more circles in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head Ing NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings
9. Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 2 This device must accept any interference that may be POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED received including interference that may cause undesired The sunroof controls are mounted between the dome operation reading lights NOTE e The transmitter has been
10. eu ct eser d RAIDER ES wee ess 215 Cooling System Vis s 4 5 hee UAE a5 eee 324 PMCS sus rur EET ERIS E RE 316 Minimum Requirements is ozise eR ans og Trailer and Tongue Weight 445094560446 4 318 Trailer Towing GUJE acd ursi 49 38 pura dae ed es 317 Triler WENT taceanbeace eG utee ene e REA a7 TANO CPI tiaraa os Btw e 246 AIVO er eree pene E 376 JXUtODU OUC 4 4 2 4 Se cR Uh bE SEES 12 243 246 374 DHIFOSUICK nuce dari t Xo SOR Ae EUR P eae 253 Jl eaae aeaee eh e ee es 376 MIenaH6B asgeir eaan aak SUR Rug EAE 374 AMON cerra fee eo OG oe eee ES 246 OVUN 23454 ohh 58 Jerks een ee eee 251 Selection of Lubricant a pse a don aen gris o en 398 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry xaxesoe bee eem rr peu 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink eu su accen y Po SOPEG SEN ERE 121 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entity adesse adero ERR ReRCR ses 25 en INDEX 445 Transportne Pes 6 24 44 344454 R44 5444 ones 79 Tread Wear Indicators 22229 oet eec dore 4 287 TODO OOE ex acis edens X Ud eee ee eee aga 154 Trip Odometer Reset Button 157 Trunk Release Emergency ass isset te 37 38 Trunk Release Remote Control 37 TURSA S a i e eraa 108 158 392 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 95 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 147 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ou vue omms 425 Universal Transmitter iss rs seta RR bbe das T1241 Unleaded Gasolifie zecea
11. 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Sp
12. ACooling Systemi 42424 nich eases esri O Drake S SION asus ssa 2 WO Rad oye ee D Automatic Transmission D Appearance Care And Protection From CONDOSIDIE civ od bao u Eu RT ete hoe e PS o Cleaning Center Console Cupholders ll Fuses o Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM W Vehicle Storage ll Replacement Bulbs 364 367 372 374 377 382 383 383 364 W Bulb Replacement 12 299 9E RR 389 E TISSU DD as ooo th ote ol oe eo ee ee ee 389 EO ANDO ne ad ao oa oe bose heme od A 391 o Taillamps Rear Turn Signals And Backup o P 392 O License Plate Lamp s 6s 424 4 445 4a 6344 4 s 394 H Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 394 la Fluid Capacities 0 396 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 397 EDBEIDB RE EZ een neg RERO EINE E 397 src Tr CT 398 388 eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 070305924 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 3 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Integrated Power Module 11 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Power Distribution Center 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 7L 070505925 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Power Distribution Center 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 8 Air Cleaner Fil
13. American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 4L and 2 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3
14. T 12 436 INDEX M lemon key Removal 24442405 G4 pri 2655 rues 12 Huminated PONY a5 esse s 35 ORE oe ed 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key uio Rao dH m SR Seas 14 Infant Restraint as sus Ree 69 70 71 Information Center Vehicle 0 164 Inside Rearview Mirror 0000005 89 Instrument Cluster 22222235238 148 150 Instrument Panel and Controls 147 Instrument Panel Cover 380 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 382 Integrated Power Module Fuses 383 Interior Appearance Care siia sema daRace Re 380 Interior LIES 2x x cs conos ERR E eae 111 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 114 Introduction naaa 8 Geheneeeees eee en SUPPE E 4 Jack Location 36 4 45 p es oe seed ee oa 329 Jack Operation v ser Re rod Se pod Sa ee ets 329 330 Jacking INSWMCUONS perest i peik 6 Side ees 330 Junp 2293433295 repki neea 335 key PIOBTODHUITIS ayers a qu dox Sane s ee RETE XS 16 Key Replacement cedo som eds m m do ed bos 15 Key sentry MMODilZer sss agia x ides Seta aes 14 Keys In Reminder usce scm que dcus pretr EErEE 14 Keyless Entry Systems acea cx ee 26 04 esames 20 36 Keyless Entry System Sedan 20 36 ISGUS deca uestes uessei2uEsi quer E ESSE a 12 Kpee Bolster PL aE E E eee 53 Lane Change and Turn Signals 158 392 Lane Change ASSIST uu este astat ees iera Ey A 109 Lop oboulder Dells 4 gneve ts eadeu eed ees eye 40 LATCH Lower
15. Tamper Alert If the alarm was triggered but the warning signals have timed out the park and taillights flash three times instead of the normal twice and the horn will chirp three times when unlocking the vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy reading lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open either door 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie This feature also turns on the approach lighting if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk lower both front windows if equipped or activate the Panic Alarm from distances approximately 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter The RKE transmitter
16. An integrated sunglass holder is located in the headliner above the sun visor To access the sunglass holder lower the sun visor Small items such as toll tickets can be stored between the two straps while sunglasses or other items can be stored above the two straps Rear Bottle Holder y 030406039 Sunglass Holder Cargo Area The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system Continued 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Contin
17. DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water consider the following Caution safety and prevent damage to your vehicle and Warning before doing so Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways
18. LODGE 2x10 Avenger OWNER S MANUAL o m O c O e esI e o e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION 44399388 9 959 80 4C soe eae ea ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION M oo LLL LLILIIILIULLLILIILIIILIIIILLLIUILLL AeLILLL OLLL LSILUO U00 ULoILU IA 0g GGUGD uIeco OCOB UucdLILLLLLILALLAALOAPIBDUOoeBGB L LG4LTGDCE E EAOLULULIGw INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you r
19. Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Charact
20. 284 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds withi
21. Incorrect trailer tongue weight could result in in creased yaw or vehicle instability A negative trailer tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability Negative trailer tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat and potentially become disengaged from the tow vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING Continued Improper towing can lead to an injury accident e Safety chains must always be used between your Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do
22. NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system will auto matically turn off when the ignition is turned OFF ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press down on the lever and release SET DECEL Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph 40 km h for the Electronic Speed Control to set e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the lever SET DECEL To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever up and release RESUME ACCEL
23. Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sa
24. and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the OFF position 62 THINGS T
25. and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering sys
26. become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants And Small Children e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less tha
27. cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury en WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 339 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi tive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually
28. coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REO RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will
29. flat tire in the cargo area and have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations for Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield To allow jump starting there are remote battery posts located on the left side of the engine compartment 1 Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap 2 Remote Negative Post WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable
30. if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE CAUTION Continued VERSE and FIRST gear Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast ning the wheels is most effective may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Electronic wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no Stability Control ESC turn the system to Partial OFF transmission shifting occurring before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Elec tronic Brake Control in Starting and Operating for a e Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed
31. in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 4 For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 15 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE Tris indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control System is ON 16 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Button Single Trip Odometer Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to trip odometer Th
32. it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop 256 STARTING AND OPERATING M
33. longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident DRIVE Six Speed Transmission This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However use the AutoStick mode and select the appropriate gear when frequent transmission shifting occurs in the DRIVE range For example When operating the vehicle under heavy load ing conditions i e in hilly terrain traveling into strong headwinds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions reducing shifting by selecting the appropriate gear in AutoStick will improve the performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up DRIVE Four Speed Transmission This range should be used for most city and highway driving it provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However select the 3 range when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions ie in hilly terrain traveling into strong headwinds or while towing heavy trailers Under t
34. or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation How Blower Control The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any speed to any air delivery point outside or recirculated Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Auto Set mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature at a time knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than io any air outside or A C on or olf Auto Set blower knob to d
35. station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatical
36. the pretensioners and or SABIC curtains on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protection WARNINCG e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 year
37. time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM
38. with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION For vehicles equipped with a 2 4L or 3 5L engine DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Etha nol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical
39. Anchors and Tether for CHildren 79 fric sE E ee ee 84 HOOL oeeo 90923 oy eso ee a RS MERI PES 105 Lead Free GasOune 25 stcese teeter HESS Hoe 4 300 Leaks Fluid 3 2229 49992429509 9294255995394 84 LeO T6522 4 299 93 9 9 39 9 2 99 eas Moi sobra up 288 Light DUlLS vs sx eee twee esr a aes 84 388 his 4caeune E asses ange ed 84 106 QUPD 6 AG geek eee hae aes S NU 62 67 82 151 ono P H 292 Drake Varning 4 05 604 2405 oe ween oieta 152 Bulb Replacement 22 lt 44 2065 h04h4e4 25 389 Center Mounted Stop euros dawn beans deen 394 Daytime KRUNDING 6 4 0 ciet rich deg ode e dea aS 110 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 269 Engine Temperature Warning i545 nn 152 ib Ru P D PR 84 DOS ggg eenaa see asset se ak LIO 159 391 Heade Nt OWI P P teas 107 Head EDIS P 107 Headlights On With Wipers 116 Hipi Beant Indicator eaa 9x ne ae et 163 Illturunaled ENY oss 406454 agran ee ee are 19 ee INDEX 437 Instrument Cluster sess 107 InfGHOP 12529 RP PROS RR EN RSS ES 111 hal erc tesa eas 4 kete See eee eee 394 Lights On Reminder as vaste itm ss 110 LOU Pel 222659 X29 eye on eee eee es 151 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 161 Map headin gence tea urbc i6 cas acc ne ERR 111 Oil Pressure ees 152 ICA PTT TIT 109 Seat Belt Reminder Ls 151 Security Alarm Theft Alarm i x reme msn 18 Theft Alarm Security Alarm
40. B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX ns CSsSCSCSCSCi Cis AbDout Your Drakes ss duos on4e2 ons TEES PARS 299 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 262 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 368 POCO JM per ee eh eee eos 309 Adding Washer Fluid 2 44 2 ed acer ehm a ois 364 Addiuves Tael gon aeauedaesauaynead ar ue 303 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 358 Air Conditioner Maintenance 360 PIPCONCIMONING o 4 eyuqerr ere pr We 225 Air Conditioning Controls ss co eret das 225 Alir CondiHonine FICE 2iceus sace 285 dew v 236 361 Air Conditioning Op
41. CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Continued ee WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES 341 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE CAUTION Continued e If the transaxle is inoperative or if the vehicle is to Front Wheel Drive be towed more than 15 miles 25 km the vehicle Your vehicle may be towed with all four wheels flat on must be transported either with a flatbed truck BE the ground under the following conditions with the front wheels off the ground otherwise transaxle damage may occur If the vehicle being towed requires steering the Towing With The Ignition Key e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles ignition switch must be in the ON position not in 25 km the LOCK or ACC position Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans axle may result e The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h CAUTION e Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans axle failure Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Continued 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the
42. Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm To Unlatch the Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped The RKE remotely lowers both driver and passenger front windows simultaneously Lowering the front win dows using the RKE is a two step operation 1 Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once 2 Press the UNLOCK button a second time and hold the button until the windows lower completely or the win dows drop to the desired level then release the button Usi
43. MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 MPEG 1 Au 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios 48 44 1 32 dio Layer 3 MPEG 2 Au dio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW m
44. Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer Reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolv ing the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not
45. RESET selection The RESET button also resets various Trip Functions RESET Button Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime after one mile traveled e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e RKE Remote Keyless Entry Battery Low with a single chime e Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not In PARK e Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle in Motion e Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion e Trunk Ajar with a single chime e Headlights On e Key In Ignition e Oil Change Required with a single chime e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped Oil Change Required If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this me
46. Requirements If your vehicle is E85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E85 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not add less than 5 gal 19 L when refueling e you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e Use seasonally adjusted E85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C 308 STARTING AND OPERATING M e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 63
47. STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed Io move the minut
48. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WARNING How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be
49. To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are
50. a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 23 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 24 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided i should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature y
51. a variable pause between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wind Changing Intermittent Settings shield wiper washer control lever to the first detent and NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h interval There are five delay settings which allow you to delay times will be doubled 031508788 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 apania To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer WARNING control lever toward you and hold it for as long as Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield washer spray is desired could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mist Feature Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long
52. accessory drive belt replace if necessary M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ee 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 114 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter I Rotate tires Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine except PZEV Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes O C C C O L LL L LL M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413 126 000 Miles 210 0
53. and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and CAUTION multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert ejected before a new disc c
54. and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or
55. any time Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time
56. as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate 031508789 Mist Control Headlights With Wipers Feature Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 4j D 031633077 Tilt Telescoping Steering Wheel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 To unlock the steering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To
57. be set at the same volume level as last played TUNE SCROLL O 042305233 Media Center 130 RES RSC 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alter
58. be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Power Mirrors Both of the outside mirrors can be adjusted by using the controls mounted on the driver s door panel A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Power Mirror Switch Mirror Directions After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same Adjusting Side View Mirrors direction you want the mirror to move When finished return the knob to the center O OFF position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Outside Mirror Driver Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a sli
59. button until ON or OFF appears Headlights Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until 0 30 60 or 90 seconds appears eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 Headlights With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
60. by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Driver Advanced Front Airbag which may receive information from the front impact sensors i ge E On eas The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an 2 e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet e Front and Side Impact Sensors the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch WARNING and Seat Track Position Sensors e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC e No objects should be placed over or near the e Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and airbag on the instrument panel because any such Front Passenger objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a Advanced Front Airbag Features collision severe enough to cause the airbag to The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver inflate and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as Continued 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air WARNING Continued bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out e Do not put anything on or around the airbag board side of the front seats covers or attempt to open them man
61. display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER RBZ Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition s
62. displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305232 Media Center 130 RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make a
63. does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE e The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects e Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on the RKE transmitter ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 020210511 Vehicle Key To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The Illuminated Entry system if equipped will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 Release both butt
64. during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an autho rized dealer Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation es ry 8 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will come on for about six seconds A chime will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt out of the retractor This is a reminder to buckle up If 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See you do not buckle up the light will remain on Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light quA This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine This can be determined using the procedure shown in Maintaining Your Vehicle 10 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi a tion If the engine is critically hot a warning chime
65. efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 294 STARTING AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings I V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will ref illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your ve
66. fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Fluid Level Check 2 4L and 2 7L Engines Use the following procedure to check the automatic transmission fluid level properly 1 Park the vehicle on level ground 2 Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Apply the parking brake fully 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the lever in PARK 5 Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transmission 6 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles 24 km Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips Cold fluid is at a temperature below 80 F 27 C 7 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Then remove dipstick and note the reading a If the fluid is hot th
67. fuel system components 302 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE The 2 7L engine is now rated for E85 Ethanol use EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 Refer to Flexible Fuel in Starting and Operating for further information Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT in Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase
68. grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push ANCHORAGE button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjustable Anchorage 022632695 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Rear Seat Belts The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three point belts are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passen gers on sedans The center belt is mounted to the rear shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder be
69. heat even at low temperatures especially if used for Low level heating Press the switch a third time gt long periods of time to shut the heating elements Off If High level heating is selected the system automatically Continued switches to Low level heating and turns one indicator light off after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation It will turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after an additional 30 minutes of 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat The recline handle on the front passenger seat also e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates releases the seatback to fold forward against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat 030907272 Seatback Adjustment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded Folding Rear Seat rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel To provide additional storage area the rear seatback can be folded forward Pull on the loops shown in the picture to fold down either or both seatbacks When returning the rear seat back t
70. ie cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or chil
71. ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the Vehicle Security Light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION e Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com patible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in ve hicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME At the time of purchase the original owner is prov
72. immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the six to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of a collision your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 Under cer
73. in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names n nm e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files
74. information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Trailer Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than or more than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 316 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg
75. inop erable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi tion Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to r
76. input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RBZ RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound
77. inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 258 STARTING AND OPERATINC M POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost system This noise should be considered normal
78. locations other than those indicated in Step 3 3 There are two front jacking locations and two rear jacking locations on each side of the body as pictured above 819b068d Removing Jack Handle From Jack WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 060533068 060533069 2 Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lower
79. lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever The CRUISE indi cator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off Be sure to turn the system off when not in use
80. not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING Continued e Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 3 GAWR Information in Starting and Operating for informa 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch tion on tread wear indicators and for proper inspection utilized This requirement may limit the ability to procedure always achieve 10 of trailer tongue weight as a M m percentage of total trailer weight o When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for information Towing Requirements Tires on replacement tires an
81. octane Gasoline ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emission control system Continued 304 STARTING AND OPERAT NG ee CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow th
82. oed d 0 obo ee 17 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 0 20 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 222 Remote Stating 5ySIeH 142244074262 4204 Y 26 Remote Trunk Release 0 000 37 E INDEX 441 Replacement BUDS s ress regti drea terii RP 388 Replacement Keys resterer iain oS eat ee 15 Replacement PariS 44 esasa si rea eae oes 302 Replacement Tes uus ac koe desc sop os ie 288 Reporting Satety Defects s s 2x os arabe d 422 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 156 166 Restraint Head lt 2d zoe Kee ES E EU 97 Restraints Child leeren 69 Restraints Infant eee 70 Rotation Tires 24 aes E aae RR oen 290 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 82 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 1 1 2o swe 84 Safety Defects Reporting ix 293 wk EAR 422 Dalely ExhaustGas serea aoeer eee rris aa rA a 81 Safety Information Tire 222222229 oe or 272 Daley 10S cose ed obe qur aR 80 Satellite Radio Antenna ss eesis 486 6554 6045 216 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 215 Schedule Maintenance leen 400 Seat Belt Maintenance 245546 25 yeh eg Rd 382 Deal Belt Reminder 2 524554 29b ose RE SE ox 51 Deal Delis saae ae bteuest 445 sbieh eee eh nee 82 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 1 43 aate es 45 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 45 And Pregnant Women 234ss0n aneceveea as 52 Child Restraint
83. of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated
84. on again by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion SEP 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Tread wear Traction and Temperature Grades ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for L I Metric ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x
85. on both sides of the vehicle Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor The
86. on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If y
87. on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remain on the Anti Lock Brake STARTING AND OPERATING 263 ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required See your authorized dealer When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel b
88. portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM Operating Instructions Radio Mode STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER l MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right sided tbetadio faceriate Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio ru Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will
89. regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 045607540 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045607541 Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level gt e Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets J NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to t
90. select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutto
91. sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue Cleaning Center Console Cupholders Removal Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward Cleaning Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the lin
92. switch on the driver door trim panel and passenger door trim panel the trunk release button on the instrument panel and the HomeLink Garage Door Opener if equipped ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON START position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm
93. system 2 Fuel Door Reminder This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is i located on the left side of the vehicle 3 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank 4 Speedometer Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour MPH and kilometers per hour km h 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level drops to approximately 2 0 gal lons 7 6 Liters the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound NOTE This light will remain on until a minimum of approximately 3 0 gallons of fuel is added 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s electrical devices such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster If the Charging System Light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See your local authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 7 Airbag Warning Light The light comes on and remains on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light does not turn on
94. that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking 054110710 brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise i the load on the transmission locking mechanism may Parking Brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The WARNING Continued parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage roll and cause damage or injury Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with th
95. the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if so equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp electrical power outlets on this vehicle Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse The instrument panel power outlet located below the climate control knob
96. the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will con tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the RESET button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE display value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units In To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently displayed Press and hold the RESET button once to clear the fun
97. the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator NOTE In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right or left 254 STARTING AND OPERATING M AutoStick is deactivated when the shift lever is shifted from the AutoStick position into the DRIVE position General Information You can start out from a stop in any gear except sixth The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed If a ratio other than first gear is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transmission control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged e The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick is engaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged If a downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine The transmission will stay in the manually selected ratio If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off If the system detects a problem
98. the towing capabilities of the vehicle Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further
99. the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected 045607559 e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e Incold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or Mix mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are s
100. through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 26 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light If Equipped 63 This light monitors the ABS This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for approxi mately three seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required however the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes The ABS warning light should be checked
101. unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until OFE 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Display ECO If Equipped The ECO message is located in the EVIC this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units In The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate gyi T 042005200 Media Center 230 REQ Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound w
102. will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works
103. will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km On MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 401 NOTE The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e
104. will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 11 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system BRAKE The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EB
105. 0 0 00004 69 78 Ibin A 52 Front Seat xax Hb bud 4 3 ASS RPS Sob den OR 40 41 IDSDOCHOI s 93 0 a9 9 al oup ohne oe S 82 Operating InstracHolis sss ses vis hEROEREOE V rs 41 lucia PED 47 Kear peat 442 3222 es eke tat hug RU DN E We 40 Iri rrr 151 Untwistng Procedure a i es exa E hee 45 Seat Belts Sedan eee eee 38 Dede Adee ook babe eee heehee eee eee be Adjustment Sm SCSCSCSC C aN CIEMNO 639399939 299 PRIEST HIS A PRESE EE 104 lai a 101 IIa SUD POL x22 E OPES REP PE E 96 Jo Aa sf 99 Reat FOID quce wx og d 9d dr a oc d oe 103 104 Rear Folding Sedan x29 ymmo 199 ISSCHDITIS 44 42 occi ok P on eee eS 2 DOS S UE 95 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 368 397 Selection of Oil 44 4442 4 0 R644 Rose SU dom ES 305 bentes Key Immobilizer 29e o4 293 Hey vs 14 Sentry Key Programming sess 16 Service Assistance llle 419 Service Contract a 9 37509 43 7995 309 90 9308 3 o a Heo 421 Service Manuals lees 423 Setting the Clock 1 css onus 176 190 192 195 204 pelles Persorldl aude passed edes HEGRE e ben T71 Shoulder Belts s 2 RAUE dO EE EE 4504 40 de ANDAS X ee ae Ash oa eee oo 63 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 236 Signals UM 354559845 hime P exea ea eas 84 392 Slippery Surfaces Driving On uus goes decre 255 Snow Chains Tire Chains
106. 00 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and J Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspe
107. 10 5 R15 LT 274 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in E STARTING AND OPERATING 275 EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates t
108. 136 A INDEX 431 Contract Service esum naaa a 421 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 369 Cooler Devera sese pasi vq dL ae ag es 140 Cooling OVSIEMD tot nee oe eae dis eee ed a E 367 Adding Coolant Antifreeze eu exa ses 4o vs 368 Coolant Capaci y ss4n282 99 5 6 pee enous ve 396 Coolant Level xc ces cee u howe d dpa 367 370 Disposal of Used Coolant 370 Drain Flush and Refill 367 FISPECHOM PD 370 Points to Remember 4 4 4 dev some 39 XY Y eg 371 Pesse Cap a sca ees 4 P EIU PRAES eee es 369 Radio UD anaes sce m a nd pee RORIS 369 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 368 396 397 Corrosion Protection eee 377 Crankcase Ventilation Module 19 Cruise Control Speed Control 118 Crise 42H vssces we saee hem ESO eases P SL S 157 CUDBOIdOES ou eus dh tee bg EUR ARS EUROS 104 133 382 Customer ASSINE 4 uuo pues b iy 9S3 CEPS PETS 419 Customer Programmable Features 171 Daytime Running Licht vasco mes 110 Dealer DODUIB po ieseni A Nota BAST AU aha d 353 Defroster Rear Window ea 139 Defroster Windshield 82 227 233 Delay Intermittent Wipers 114 Diagnostic System Onboard vucoscesi teciees 350 Dimmer Switch Headlight ie er ea des 109 Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle 375 376 SE nir geal ae ey E oe me ae he 354 POWer OLDS 1s 24 esed qae ox tag gaa s 2
109. 369 Rat Washes rm 378 Carbon Monoxide Warning 81 304 Largo ted eatttes as ts e een bs eee ERE Sn 135 Carpo COM paren s 2 vq ques rore pene P ves 135 Cargo Load FOOF MN Ur eae a eas 135 Cargo Vehicle L ading cei Seit aene ta pe 908m n 135 Cellular PRONE sas nn 6 hs oS SEE kria BH 93 224 Center High Mounted Stop Light 394 Chains Lire s euet RS SUR C2244 ese bases 289 changing A Plat Ile ix ous rtr eg e x4 929 Char DUO IAS eck cetera deemed d o ded e 274 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 351 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 80 Check OaE ases Se see os EAE RS TIERS ESI 80 Child Restraint 5 522 Rs 69 71 75 78 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 7379 Chl Sane LOCKS ous xe scq sence RC PAR nas 32 Cigar EIPDISE ax esca eis dene ag ee eee ees 132 Clean Air Gasoline 0 20 0c cee eee 301 Cleaning Wheels 2 1 es 379 Windshield Wiper Blades lt 0cd lt ustyuetaes 363 Climate Control a4 4 44 susc e mes 224 ael serae beeen ads oe eee 176 190 192 195 204 Coin Holder 42444680054 Bes beard E ean PETRA S 136 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 224 Compact Spare te vauusssquersuesdued tiaki 285 Sono LC 169 Compass Calibration 444 an ye cae oN ee ERROR 169 Compass Variance s 649 555 6555 nirt bee GS es 170 Computer tip Travel x3 eue RSE m ERST 19 167 Console 44 445 Babee ENSE me Bees ee ean TE 104 136 Console Floor een 104
110. 5 c M P ITI O70 Drake DODNIIS piekeeudgas a dete gee ENS m Wa 259 Fluid and Filter Changes Ls 3 0 Drake cci Lee 372 Hund Level Cieck 2 00 dn S4 999 des DAD OB Ant Lock ADS reris eben aca ede dos on 262 Interlock System PPP 249 Pd CIE seres i rerata a9 eom d ee dca 372 298 ReschMOde 2icieeoae anus Esp Patios a bee 2502 Waster CV BOO 42224004 Gage Searata cous 372 oelection OF LubPIatt 244402065 thu e We TAKDE 122 5253 459 ite pde d 50 FR Gd E Rn 299 ODIT eae wires SEP PUN eee a IE ITI S 249 Warne Lie xs esed vus ware dpt acr x du d 152 Opedal AddiUVES acu cacscsord dosi qoe sure Roses S ESI lC ecc 372 AOSE MCCC pe Os a BO 253 Brake Transmission Interlock 2 0 6 5 ed 6 a6 S94 248 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 79 hon O06 Bulb Replacement x3 ac nac yon mm gone os 388 389 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE Ze PUPS DIE eser gei eerie g boa ye ees 84 388 Fico A 358 Delly Heat as bance eo eek d pedre eider Go FE 82 Calibration Compass 000 169 Pevar e COO B sacs 9 544560 IP e aHER oes 140 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 19 Body Mechanism Lubrication SpA apace BHL 254254 qup E EU ES EES USES 396 430 INDEX M Caps Filler POCI 309 Oil Ene oes 6 04 a hee ees 347 348 349 356 Power Deerin cue a cios e RUE RUP C9 oq e ge 259 Radiator Coolant Pressure
111. 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or go
112. 6 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Prolonged use of limited use spare or an incorrect tire size on either front wheel may damage transmis sion differential and result in loss of vehicle mobil ity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or icy conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping STARTING AND OPERATING 287 Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener a
113. 9 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the dr
114. 95 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 3076 compared to gasoline operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure FUSE ellen ep ae Gap that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left rear patible parts quarter panel of th
115. 99 Disabled Vehicle Towing llle 341 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant curd e 370 PO O 5209 2208s os de ee eee RE 357 Door LOCKS 4 2 icuiceS EE perde Sd IRSE ERR EE 29 432 INDEX M Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water DVD Player Video Entertainment System E 85 Fuel Electric Rear Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Program ESP Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Emergency In Case of Jacking Jump Starting Towing Emergency rink Release 242222499493 RS 37 38 Emission Control System Maintenance 351 400 Bn was R5 pu EXE ES NAE RI SS 347 348 349 Air Cleaner eee 358 Block mI MCCC Y RO TE TSTTTEETTTCCITOTT 246 Break In Recommendations 79 Checking Om Level es ues qae Ss eet RENS 354 Coolant Antifreeze 907 907 Sos T r 367 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 81 304 Fouls TO SUL owe bce S Sa 6 P FO amp er s ER d 244 Hooded Starting 2 4 42 veches Giveasdaes 244 Fuel Requirements usua actus o eher es 300 396 Jomp icri CL 335 Oll 15a dde ane Ge Ro Peer os ird d 354 396 397 Oil Change Interval 156 166 355 400 CUDDIBE Cap 444404 een te ess 347 348 349 356 Oil Piller 4232 e4 5 eee eet REESE oes 207 Oil Filter Disposal uou peser 1
116. AND OPERATING M 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then straight forward back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Pasa is confor TEA edea Pepe Dae BEES 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature 4 Start the engine to it s previous setting 5 Release the clutch pedal EVIC Equipped Vehicles HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC 6 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left A E Det extare 7 Press the ESC Off switch four times within 20 sec refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC onds The ESC Off Indicator Light should turn on and Customer Programmable Features in Understanding turn off two times Your Instrument Panel for further information 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to de
117. Battery Feed Auto Shutdown ASD Relay MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 Cartridge Fuse Ignition Off 19 20 Amp Draw IOD Yellow Power Amp Feed 2 If Equipped Ignition Off 20 Sad Draw IOD Blue Radio n 0AmpRd Ignition Run Climate 22 10 Amp Red Controls Hot Cupholder If Equipped Auto Shutdown 23 DAMP Lt ASD Relay Blue Feed 3 Cavity Mini Fuse Description 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cavity Cartridge Mini Fuse Description Mini Fuse Description Battery Feed Ignition Run Mp Sunroof Occupant Classi fication Module 10 Amp Red OCM Occupant Re straint Controller ORC ASD Relay Hot Car No 5 ed 2 Fuse un Ignition Run 20 Amp Ignition Run Occupant Classi Yellow Heated Seats fication Module It OCM 31 10Amp Red Occupant Re Auto gods straint Controller 30 Amp ASD Relay ORC Pink ie 1 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Battery Feed Battery Feed Switch Bank Anti Lock Brakes Diagnostic Link ABS Module 10 Amp Red Connector 35 40 Amp If Equipped Powertrain Green Electronic Stabil Control Module ity Control ESC PCM Module Battery Feed It Equipped Anti Lock Brakes Battery Feed 8 Module 2 Ap Passenger Dos 34 Amp quipped Pink aos Pink Electronic Stabil Driver Door ity Control ESC Module DDM Module 25 Amp Power Top Mod If Equipped Natural ule I
118. Cap Fuel Filler Cap asses y 309 311 350 Gasoline Clean Air een 301 Gasoline Fuel 23493 9e x ou eR ER ERES 300 Gasoline Reformulated 301 A INDEX 435 Gauges Coolant Temperate 3 23 9 9 19 9d trpe 150 lor 150 S oio PES 154 dE ni MTS PDT cC PIC 154 Geatshl C ECTP 249 General Information 2432 92 33 t3 17 299 General Maintenance s 24 648 44 eS edn Ghee 353 Glass CIBO oy aee dw eacus mes theese TES 381 Glove COMPANINGN a a a5 a aaa 9 Geen ee a S aen 140 Gross Axle Weight Rating usse 65 464 40 312 315 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 312 314 OVWR E 912 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 93 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water esee RELY 256 Hazard Warning Plasher sa 2o heces 327 Head Restraints 62 4646 em E49 9A d ORIS TOP 97 Pead ES saat eneraceeee Gages seas RUE a 389 Bulb Replacement ustedes 4 astro porn cee ee es 389 ClCH Lr cok eae ees 4m se 4 979 P e DO eeng e 109 163 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 109 nal IPES serrr ri oe Seances coma 116 Po SE aa essc 444g nisi 2600 60a 109 WN asan reee ESET 107 Heated Sette reas dtir aeaa aei sane 101 POE P Pc 29 Liedter Engine Block uas vds dedo ARAS 246 Hitches Trailer TOWING x4 13 999 39 Ue eat ea ped 8 316 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 121 Hood Release 57445464 53 9 3 s deii duod ote 4 105 JonrDol s4wases ebbP LS 4 0 924903 4 35 4 12 KEY
119. Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M Once a Month CAUTION e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake i pages for the required maintenance intervals master cylinder and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change c rnr coriIreo o0 moz zzm z z e Change the engine oil filter hj Inspect the brake hoses and lines ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditi
120. Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 Kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings ets Max GTW Max Trailer Tongue Wt Engine Transmission Max Frontal Area Gross Trailer Wt Sce Note 1 2 4L Auto 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 2 7L Auto 1 500 Ibs 680 kg 150 Ibs 68 kg 3 5L Auto 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 900 kg 200 Ibs 90 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Note 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Note 2 Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields guards are not recommended for use with all four cylinder and 2 7L engines with automatic transmission Please see your authorized dealer for addi tional information 318 STARTI
121. D failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately three seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 12 Tachometer The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 14 OdometerlTrip Odometer Display Area The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle ha
122. Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 MPEG 1 Au dio Layer 3 MPEG 2 Au dio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 48 44 1 32 WMA Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 160 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supp
123. E e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance While operating in AUTO the system will not auto matically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield The defrost mode must be manually se lected to clear the windshield and side glass ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off 045607536 position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode
124. E M 5 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover epee dau A C Air Filter Replacement 6 Remove the A C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 7 Install the A C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C Air Filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often 8 Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The ex
125. E ORO S 0 357 A INDEX EXC Oil Selection 46463 4s444ae625 5 ome 355 396 OU SVOQCUe socrii epee eae GOES 357 D i 2 405 0 gore Jaa Hub ee eto a rod 327 PIONS nonce cet o uo e eee ent a bese 243 Temperate alice wigs dod rie ced ee agai 150 Engine Oil Viscosity wis gone ioo S gore 33 cars 356 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 64 Entry System Illuminated 522r ER mne 19 Pinal c ves ueea eme wise EXER TES 301 Exhaust Gas Caution lesen 81 304 Phau DU SICA a ous 3 3 93 Hoy C Soles 81 364 Extender Seat Belt i5245 22225 245a e ERYG E 52 EXIGNOI EIS US uices xe ges 3 on apa eine wee dr 84 Fabric Care eee 380 Filler Location Fuel 0 0 150 309 Filters Ait Cleaner 4 626 2u 4 ao 49 6e ee 55 os 4 358 Air CONCIMONING quide f oH ea we eke 236 361 Automatic Transaxle 2292222 9 RR 376 Lucie sg sen egere PIE Heese ao TE 357 397 Pacgme OU DISposal sses eon tosses ee os 357 Hasher 6 tec a Soe ee ho ed eas eee eA 327 Hazard Warning srca pisa Pots 8 Sie ee a ia 327 TUIS E 84 392 FHash 0 PaSS ad05446 206 4445 bE rr RE EE 109 Flexible Fuel Vehicles less 305 Ce ROUES oror rri aes 4er e E ES ER 308 mene OI Pr 308 EUGPROQqUIECIHOBES sarisi poo ne Fear 305 307 Maintenance lt lt lt xecak nm been BAUR E X R3 305 309 Replacement Paris ooa v naci sra qat come ee ee 309 DUAN vor ued oh EX PPS Ue S QURE RM ECL 308 Flooded Engine Starting 252i xo e 244 Floor Console
126. EL 145 B Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play O Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Bl Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RBZ RES Radios Only D System Activation o Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID O Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode O Satellite Antenna D Reception Quality 214 O Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode O Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped ll Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped O Right Hand Switch Functions O Left Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation O Left Hand Switch Functions For Media i e CD Operation 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M E CD DVD Disc Maintenance 224 D Automatic Temperature Control ATC W Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 224 BEG Pa e a iden n B Climate Controls 000 224 PROPANE MEE e tetas eae aa ees Pe o Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 225 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Y 0 amp 4 4j 040132700 Air Outlet 5 Beverage Can Cooler Bin 9 Power Outlet 2 Side Window Demister Outlet 6 Glove Compartment 10 Climate Controls 3 Instrument Cluster 7 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 11 Trunk Release Bu
127. FROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control fo
128. HSA will activate the brake control system and a clicking noise may occur If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 HSA Activation Criteria The system will only work if the intended direction of the The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the activate intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met HSA will Vehicl t be st d i e Vehicle must be stoppe activate e Vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back NEUTRAL ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA Off 5 WARNING Non EVIC Equipped Vehicles If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 7 With a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within may occur which could cause a collision with an 90 seconds other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 268 STARTING
129. INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to
130. ISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message
131. KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC they are located above the side windows The trim covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e nstrument Panel ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e Knee Impact Bolster determined
132. Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 CAUTION NOLE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and failure or condition warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel
133. NG AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or cause severe engine damage under extreme condi tions Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause Consider the following items when computing the loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load weight on the rear axle of the vehicle trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents 057003767 e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight put in or on your vehicle stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Operat ing for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle CAUTION
134. NG YOUR VEHICLE ie There is a single window control on the passenger s door trim panel which operates the passenger door window The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and when the accessory delay feature is active WARNINCG Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Window Down If Equipped The front window controls on the driver and passenger door trim panels have an Auto Down feature These switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Auto Window Up If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To cancel the Auto Up movement operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when y
135. NING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedur
136. NTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNINCG Do not remove the A C Air Filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove box and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door 3 Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box This is done by grasping the dampener connector on the outside of the box and the end of the connector pin on the inside of the box with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand Once disconnected the dampener will retract under neath the instrument panel if you release it 4 Pivot the glove box downward 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICL
137. O KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument
138. OU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 421 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional
139. RTING AND OPERATING 277 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location Jc 5 LH RICS gages SPS A ROE Tett JTITCHERIWEETEEMVWIEILIISERV ER NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 1 on the driver s side B Pillar 2 T125 70D15 3 420kPa 60PSI 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 27
140. Rhvthm and Blues No program type or None undefined Religious Talk Rel Talk Adult Hits Adilt Hit 3 Classic Rock Cls Rock Gore Rock Soft Rck eee 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped gt I e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped mm e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if sup
141. Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine except PZEV Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessaryt Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code 410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Mainten
142. Vehicle for further information Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the WARNING operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event e Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed of an accident and could result in serious injury or death or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to oper ating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Continued Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Power Seats If Equipped The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use the seat control switch to move 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING the seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat Use the seatback control to adjust the angle of the seatback Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat b
143. YOUR VEHICLE 391 Fog Lamps 3 Rotate the bulb and connector 1 4 turn counterclock 1 Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is _ limited 4 Pull the bulb off of connector and replace with a new 2 Turn the steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner fender shield l CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M n Taillamps Rear Turn Signals and Backup Lamps The turn signal brake taillamps and backup lamps are located in the rear corner body panel housing 27 819ba519 2 Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the taillamp housing 1 Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner behind the taillamp ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 4 Twist and remove socket from lamp 5 Remove bulb from socket and replace cdd crates den 3 Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly outward pushing gently on the studs from inside to disengage the lamp housing 81aa98c0 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M License Plate Lamp 2 Gently pry the lamp assembly loose 1 Remove two retaining screws holding the light lens in 3 Pull bulb from socket replace and reattach the lamp place assembly with the two retaining screws Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 1 Open the trunk lid to find the centrally located hig
144. activate cies MEME ee BIO Resume Speed o 2s esaeaue es 6844484 E 119 O Sunshade Operation o To Vary The Speed Setting s s 119 D Wind Buffeting 6 6s seen eee 5 To Accelerate For Passing 120 O Sunroof Maintenance 129 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 121 a Ignition Off Operation 130 D Programming HomeLink 122 W Electrical Power Outlets 130 H Gate Operator Canadian Programming 125 vaca RE MM 7 DEN m i a s W Cupholders 0 0 0 00 ee ee 133 Py OUR ee E Hen O Rear Seat Bottle Holder 134 O General Information 126 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M rp MCCC DD nm 134 o Video Console If Equipped 138 O Driver s Side Sunglass Holder ll Rear Window Features 199 PAD ESG iet detorduodtet dustsioetordde ius O Rear Window Defroster 199 EIC roi 254440 qu ae OE net niga ves 135 ll Chill Zone Beverage Cooler Storage Mi Console Features 04 De COmparticnt seassa aa cat bsed as 140 O Dual Storage DnS S s acie Roue aoe RE SR eas 137 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can
145. al scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible 314 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing this section please consult your dealer to for full details on
146. an be loaded a second CD if one is already loaded l l l MM l Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio other side is a CD should not be used and they ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and EJECT Button Ejecting a CD seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 Press the EJECT button to eject the CD can cause damage to the player ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button a
147. ance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 102 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and Rotate tires replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 2 4L PZEV Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary 2 7L and 3 5L Engines Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Replace the timing belt 3 5L Engine Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Flush and replace the engine coolant damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect
148. and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive battery post To remove the cover press the locking tab and pull upward on the cover Locking Tab 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper
149. and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery To Accelerate for Passing Pr
150. anual Door Locks 29 LH Power Door Locks 2 c eo xu 30 O Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOORS 4 aed auc Re EA X an ds 32 W Power Windows 00 eee ee 33 O Power Window Switches x ve oe mcm m es 39 0 Auto Window Down If Equipped 34 o Auto Window Up If Equipped 35 A Rest AWO UP Sek eae duced dcs a d parari 35 E Window Lockout Switch us u kt 36 o Using The Remote Open Windows Feature With Key FOB If Equipped 36 O Wind Buletine ue op 8e p x Fon SOR ROB SCR oes 36 W Trunk Release 0002 008 37 W Trunk Safety Warning 37 B Trunk Internal Emergency Release 38 ll Occupant Restraints 0005 38 O Lap Shoulder Belts vi grad 30 ddp E Rates 40 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 45 D Advanced Front Airbag Features 9D Li Rear Seat Belts 29 uo bm py 3A 46 0 Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 60 D Automatic Locking Retractors ALR D Event Data Recorder EDR 67 I E e E a OChild Restaints 4c vens veh ERE REIS 69 Bede PEI REGIE e a ee a il Mi Engine Break In Recommendations 79 SU negra a eee a ig qct fecus IPS Pr 80 i a crete eas mere anand en mE 51 O Iransporhng Passengers i145 edeaed 45 80 7 BeltAlert Programming 0000 51 ETXhaHe dS ace santas EE EE 81 gt Sent Belis And Pregnan
151. ar Sed ao sede que deini rarei gi 103 oO Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest 104 ll To Open And Close The Hood 105 NERIS i ee a ee ES dide d 106 E Mul f neHon Lever uk essc rex eias 106 o Headlights And Parking Lights 107 D Automatic Headlights If Equipped 108 E Headlight Time Delay aeo x eu t 108 DTU DIS Hal ua s aurae eee eds ates Edo 108 O Lane Change ASSISE uiua s ea oom ene bk 109 O High Low Beam Switch x fuse av gence d ary s 109 O Flash To Pass 0 000 ce eeee 109 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M oO Fog Lights If Equipped 110 B Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 110 Eights On Reminder uu aces irta napiti 110 O Instrument Panel Dimmer 111 O Map Reading Interior Lights D ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 112 O Intermittent Wiper System s 3 eee ene 114 BO Windshield Washers 115 A Wiis DOSE UE uoc gas a uode ace oh a woe d 116 o Headlights With Wipers Feature Available With Automatic Hesdlehis Only 2x aq remia krae 116 B lilt Telescoping Steering Column 117 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Mi Electronic Speed Control 0 118 M Power Sunroof If Equipped 127 ullo reni PTT 118 EISHnroDE Opera ON 425 95 osu stay o p ti 128 o To Set a Desired Speed 2o scere Rt 119 o Auto Sunroof Express With Anti Pinch O To De
152. at the front of the hinged armrest provides Release Top Compartment access to these storage areas P P Release Bottom Compartment Top Compartment Bottom Compartment HH WO NR The left latch opens to the top storage area 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The lower bin can be accessed directly without first Video Console If Equipped exposing the upper bin by operating the right latch with The optional Video Entertainment System VES in the armrest down cludes the following components The first storage bin can be used to hold smaller items e The screen for a rear seat DVD player is stored under The lower storage bin includes a molded in coin holder iac room for CD s DVD s and a power outlet that allows a Remote Control cellular phone to recharge while concealed s Audio Vices RCA tae NOTE e A notch in the side of the console base under the armrest will also allow use of cellular phone while still plugged into the power outlet and with the armrest latched down e The power outlet located inside the console can also energize the cigar lighter in the available Smoker s Package UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Mode knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button wi
153. aterial Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 2 4L Engi t iiem ugs name except ZFR5F 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 11 mm Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine with Du ugs A wl ZFR5AP Gap 0 031 in 0 8 mm Spark Plugs 2 7L Engine TE10PMC5 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Spark Plugs 3 5L Engine ZFR5LP 13G Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ie Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Fuel Selection 3 5L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended PZEV Partial Zero Emission Vehicle Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part eae MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed Automatic Transmission ATF 4 product MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is Brake Master Cylinder not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake flu ids MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Power Steering Reservoir MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Emissions Control System Maintenance 400 Bl Maintenance Schedule 400 H Required Maintenance Intervals 402 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 400 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See EM
154. ation will be shown in the selected language 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Auto Unlock on Exit When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position all doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is se lected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selec tion press and release the RESET button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the RESET
155. ause severe per sonal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Lock Plunger 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Power Door Locks A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors NOTE To prevent you from locking your key in the vehicle the power door LOCK switch will not operate when the key is in the ignition and the driver door is open A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key e Auto Door Locks If Equipped When enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer See your authorized dealer for programming 021832686 Power Door Lock Switch ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Auto Unlock On Exit Auto Unlock On Exit Programming The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit fea
156. awo snake hr LIPTOATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEV ENGINE GE REAR WINDOW REAR FOG LAMP mid MEINE DEFROST AND VONTILATIWG FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WWETL MARNWNO PANKIN DEFROST LOWEN AR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE ETT F I TOW aD oq Ane d hos Aum BATTERY HEATED MARRON SEAT BELT BUDNO DOOR m Lv AR CONDITIDAING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARMMG TOW ALL CHASGING Sonat a ra TETHER ANCHOR DUTTON C a ce SOx aL z V 20 A uw GLOW PLUG on Mu WwPER SOFASGBAG AIRBAG BUDINO DOOR Dom A mime AAD TEMER TOR HAZARD rat nme SRS X isi AIC C Y G E RIRBRG to Ag lt gt M PUSH OFF MALFUNCTION Pi ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL WASSENGER DOOR AJAR yi og SEE OWNERS am ELECTRONAC HMIWCATOS HONT ni TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM Ar aa4G OFF c 7 0d ur MANAL OO CONTTTIOWER STABAITY OFP 010507683 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on engraved on the front right door sill under door sill moulding and on the vehicle registration
157. can be initiated by pressing the VR button vR located on the radio or steering wheel controls if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect Phone User Manual located on the DVD for further details SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Manual Front Seat Adjustments WARNING The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat to the Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is desired position After releasing the adjusting bar apply dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could forward and rearward body pressure to be sure the seat cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be is latched properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked f e 030907275 Manual Seat Adjusting Bar ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster Reclining Bucket Seats If Equipped The recliner control is on the side
158. card EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 865 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 865 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib ess 160 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 281 282 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss
159. cause the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installe
160. ce of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 296 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Modu
161. cle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other Ways en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING WARNING Continued Pedals that cannot move freely ca
162. ct the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _J Rotate tires L Replace the engine air cleaner filter _I Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine except PZEV _J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xx PZEV Partial Zero Emission Vehicle t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your v
163. ction currently displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the RESET button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Display The compass heading indicates the direction A the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight COMPASS compass heading and the outside tempera Button ture NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually When the ve hicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will flash the CAL indicator until the compass is calibrated You may calibrate the compass by completing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc
164. cuments 422 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra
165. d Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control Map Reading Interior Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rearview mirror Each light can be turned on by pressing the barrel Press the barrel a second time to turn the light off Both of these lights can swivel so that the light can be aimed at a specific spot if desired The lights 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically Interior lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 031433076 Interior Dome Lamp There is a second light located midway back in the headliner To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open To restore interior light op
166. d as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system 9 We Limp meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Ai Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchorage 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
167. d be used for almost all driving situa tions ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial ESC Mode This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the heater air conditioning controls When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally with the exception of engine power reduction This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation 272 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings In the Partial ESC mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail able NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC
168. d for proper tire replacement l l l procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carry e Do nor attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact ing capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and pue mes GAWR limits e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or ating for proper tire inflation procedures vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes e Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING e An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake brake controller is not required system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of ma 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad
169. d restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint A Tether Strap Hook B Tether Anchor 1 Cover 3 Attaching Strap 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which are de
170. ders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz samplin
171. din aactor ee d 108 Tire and Loading Information Placard 278 Tire Identification Number TIN 276 Tite D TGERDBS erena d otro pa drop de db ed 272 Tire Safety Information 2a ve Sa ceo n aon t 272 jr 04 282 425 meine Lile of THES uie dus care teeny Gees 288 LE arr DP 282 Guru AC eines hte se haeaoe S 289 Chang us avos ede ea saga eee BI shag a 929 Compact opare es oa dei d m Y SOR aborde Ree 285 General Information uurdcuos oa 9 3299 ood obe d 282 Teed T 284 Intlation Pressures serra Cure rire x ve ease si 283 VOCS wine hud Soe Gated ee pases RA TES 329 Lite Df TES sirat eorr scar denos eR rom eens 288 Load C abpaclB ux duni t god doe Poe 278 279 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 291 Pressure Wartung LICH seseriai 9 RO oes 159 Quality Grading Be NN NNI Kanal 2424554552454 e4542 6594 e eo bees 285 Replacement Fr Ree a4 ORES 288 KOTON x xus come REI E ew eee SE 290 ci ae cae eh ee hp heads oe eee ae GY 272 282 ET L2 Ga ae OG Dee eee ee ee 1 aita 274 DOW TIEBS 46444 464444644406 458640040 290 DPale MWe Seaacen coos ee ee eee eS a oe 929 OANE oat we ase g S hu ede I P ERESESTE 286 Tread Wear Indicators ls 287 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 318 TOWING rr a Ot nega oe aes 313 Disabled Vehicle lt 2 lt 4 44 2460454 2344 e6 341 Guide eee ee ee ee ee 317 Recreational 223239434 ibet edirs 324 up eire a E oe 34 317 Taco 442244 uer errr ar 299 Walet JOWO
172. ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes with adequate braking capacity Failure to do this could lead to Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size effort and longer stopping distances stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working properly including hazard flashers Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range third gear for a four speed automatic and the fifth gear for a six speed AutoStick should be selected NOTE Using third or fifth instead of DRIVE while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmis
173. e Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick Either the range mark ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking Nee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Engine Oil Selection CAUTION For best performance and maximum protection under all Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine types of operating conditions the manufacturer recom will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the pressure and an increase in oil temperature This requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 could damage your engine
174. e parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Continued 262 STARTING AND OPERATING M aerea diner ya The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased AAI AKCE TERTII e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous Continued manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces WARNINCG e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake Warning Light moni amp e3 tors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come
175. e Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB if equipped en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Q Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries
176. e approximately one quarter turn to the LOCK or UNLOCK position as indicated by the stamped icons N 021832689 Child Lock Control WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up UNLOCKED position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches The window controls on the driver s door trim panel operate the door windows and the rear windows NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 021932687 AUTO Power Window Switch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTI
177. e backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are di
178. e eriei 309 H Loose Filler Cap Message S AME W Vehicle Loading i226 Ra hee 311 D Vehicle Certification Label i n 311 D Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 912 XO Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 312 AVOGA 3344256 TRRIRANTRESAEEPS 9195 LOANS UPC 313 Mi Trailer Towing 0 004 313 DB Common Towing Definitions 314 oO Trailer Hitch Classification 2s esc vy 2s 316 O Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 317 E Trauer And Tongue Weight ss Sue eee ts 318 O Towing Requirements sx due yon 319 EJowiDS IIPS sawigd deabus eiie 9 Rd 929 E Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc lle 324 B Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The CHOU see xcGa qs ERSGqaddnaisq 3 324 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before yo
179. e following procedure 1 Press and release the UNLOCK button on the trans mitter 2 Within five seconds press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the desired level or until they lower completely Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK RELEASE Use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to open the trunk from outside the vehicle From inside the vehicle the trunk lid can be released by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel Trunk Release Button NOTE The shift lever must be in PARK for this switch to operate With the ignition ON the word deck will display in place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is depressed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the
180. e liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Without Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all ee STARTING AND OPERATING 245 the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine is flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking up to 15 sec onds with the accelerator pedal p
181. e precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired p
182. e reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD If the fluid level is low add sufficient fluid through the filler dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replen ishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated properly Fluid Level Check 3 5L Engine The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only Transmission Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information In addition change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives
183. e same time ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 e ECONOMY MODE Automatic Operation If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn The Automatic Temperature Control system automati OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at move the temperature control to the desired temperature the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger Automatic Temperature Control ATC Operation of the system is quite simple If Equipped 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dialin the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati 045607537 Cally using the heating system Should 045607534 Automatic Temperature Control 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOT
184. e transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming Begin Programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away fr
185. e vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this CAUTION vehicle Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E85 fuel follow the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability Fuel Filler Door 310 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable CAUTION over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicles e Damage to the fuel system or emission control surface system could result from using an improper fuel z tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Tether Cable NOTE If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the Continued replacement cap is for use with this vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING Continued e Never add fuel when the eng
186. e while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Opening a door with the system activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with EVIC For details refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal Sound Horn with Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable
187. e word Trip displays to show that the odometer is in Trip Mode Press and release the button again to change the display back to the odometer To reset the trip odometer first set the display to Trip Mode Then push and hold the button approximately two seconds until the display resets to 0 miles km The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom eter Dual Trip Odometer If Equipped Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to Trip A Press and release it a second time to change the display to Trip B Press and release it a third time to change the display back to the odometer To reset the trip odometer first display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approximately two seconds until the display resets to 0 miles km The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer 17 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Indicator Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing however see your autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss an elevated
188. ead Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors O Inside Day Night Mirror D Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped O Power Mirrors o Adjusting Side View Mirrors B Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped ll Uconnect Phone If Equipped ll Voice Command If Equipped 69 AP 93 89 O Manual Front Seat Adjustments 94 90 O Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster 90 D sie 01 9 61 6 aera aaa ee ae a ae ideo gg J 91 O Reclining Bucket Sedis aa Puce 39 x Ern hs 95 92 O Lumbar Support If Equipped 96 93 O Adjusting Active Head Restraints 97 93 D Power Seats If Equipped 99 o Heated Seats If Equipped 101 B Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 102 AFoking Ke
189. ead the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 det Lee ee Se E ELECTNONC STABILITY AE WATER IR FUEL aa m M EXTERIOR SULG HIGH BEAM TURN SONALS UPPER AR HEATED SEAT DODR LOCK ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRA FAILURE PEDALS SPEEDCONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM HRANE G amp Yt G W D q B NJ C X e 4 2 uk A Ww Owe LOW haw wey POWER QUE VEPER een MIDI WIDOW Lier er m m ware PA Y m ers 8 AD 2 7 Haw Ba H8 CO FUEL FELL SIDE ae AW DONE LIGHT FRONT FOO UGHT HOOD RELEASE RECINC ULATION CONVERTIBLE THACTION mx PARURE Of ANT LOCK AM WINDOW DOWN CONTWM WAKING YTIFM e P w D s is Qt C X ae JA
190. earward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraints e Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it All passenger seating positions contain automatic locking retractors However any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt pat
191. eater f Equipped 246 E Gear KANG eso thee Sacr d Cue e WE EA 249 lBl AutoStick If Equipped 253 EICODGRIUOBN aio deen 06 RCRECALE ces ad EXRR HE 253 240 STARTING AND OPERATING xe O General Information ss 254 o Traction Control System TCS 265 E Driving On Slippery Surfaces 25D U Brake Assist System BAS sock omes 265 A Acceleration sues oe aaa aem Rodrigo 29D o Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped 266 AMANO avare wa de be eae eee bee oe 299 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 269 E Driving Through Water 256 W Tire Safety Information 272 O Flowing Rising Water 256 Sie MEUS 24 245 os PE d ve SR E ita os 272 O Shallow Standing Water 235 O Tire Identification Number TIN 276 IM Power cleCnne usos ud ach Red EE ES E 258 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 2 7 O Power Steering Fluid Check 2 uu eue 259 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 278 lg Parking Brake eee ee 259 W Tires General Information 282 W Anti Lock Brake System ABS 262 O Tire Press re 2 4 52 933 ve IPAE sek oe 282 ll Electronic Brake Control System 264 Elite Intlation Presses ucc xd teES Gee xs 283 oO Anti Lock Brake System ABS 4 422 omes 264 A RadiakPIy ites 224 ese d act unt tret fiti 285 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 EICOm
192. eatures ll Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP9S7 WMA AUX Jack ys auk ue de ee 174 D Operating Instructions Radio Mode 174 D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 183 H Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 185 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se O List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play D Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play lll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD NAV If Equipped s acne nim beso erba O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped uu e i na es D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped O Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio O Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio ll Media Center 130 RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play isa dud uranio res o Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Radio H Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MPS Audio Play 224m umen o Notes On Playing MP3 Files O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PAN
193. ed WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft lbs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided en WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 335 WARNING JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly the places provided so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any 10 Place the deflated
194. edia may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio
195. efore Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to Keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst ov
196. ehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 424 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee vehicle system and or components is written in e Owner s Manuals straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve Call toll free at hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by ot eee en ee step troubleshooting and drivability procedures e 1 800 387 1143 Canada proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools Or and equipment Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 425 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were establ
197. ehicle Battery power is required to release the brake transaxle interlock system There is an override system that allows you to shift out of PARK in case of loss of power To activate the override system e Firmly apply the parking brake Insert the ignition key and rotate it to the ON position Remove the cupholder liner Insert a key screwdriver or similar object into the front hole then push and hold the manual override release lever forward While holding the release lever forward move the shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL Release the override MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Engine Compartment 2 4L 347 W Maintenance Procedures 353 lBl Engine Compartment 2 7L 348 BB 91 MC 354 Bl Engine Compartment 3 5L 349 ELEDe ne Pier ecco vicos ores ob ease Se 357 lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 350 O Pagine An Cleaner Filter sea rerarapirad 358 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 350 O Maintenance Free Battery a xkeseRkenkeei W Emissions Inspection And Maintenance O Air Conditioner Maintenance LYOPTOUS 2 a sce m usos wee ee been one ease ses 351 A C Air Filter If Equipped 361 W Replacement Parts llle 352 E 1s eer ran ame UTER 362 W Dealer Service issued dE ES uh eevee TAA 353 o Windshield Wiper Blades 363 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME H Adding Washer Fluid o Exhaust System
198. ehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues Gas eee eee ee hag aa 419 O Prepare For The Appointment 419 APrepare A List 44444 fevere apne ade rri d 419 o Be Reasonable With Requests 419 W If You Need Assistance 419 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 420 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 420 Hn Medco Contactes sse x Ee xc hea a Vor 420 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 421 H eve CONOCI 4 44ut 59 6 unde RR ee SR 421 Bl Warranty Information 422 EM MOPARS Paris sos xd eR E ERR 422 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 422 O In The 50 United States And Washington D C 0 In Canada B Publication Order Forms 418 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Traction Grades ws xp ee otesuoee Res 425 Quality eur P 425 D Treadwear 4 oo 48 ea od CESSES HESS bene 425 Temperate Grades s ocior PR Pm ee eats 426 eee FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 419 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers wi
199. ehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored in a compartment behind the left front fender and is accessible without removing the tire and wheel Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to _Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information To access the battery turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identif
200. ehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light in the should go out with the engine running If the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It ESC Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continu ously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Malfunc tion Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation eee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 ESC Operating Modes All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode shoul
201. el contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commerci
202. elected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or Mix mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Mix and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibil ity of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
203. elivery point recirculated Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable A C on or olf 81412736 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through
204. elt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path 030907274 Power Seat Switches 1 Seatback Control 2 Seat Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Heated Seats If Equipped continuous operation If Low level heating is selected This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats the system automatically turns the heater and the indi The controls for the heated seats are located in the center cator light off after approximately 30 minutes of continu console below the climate controls ous operation After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High o WARNING ts P RCM WARNING Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes Off spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise 4y ing Press the switch a second time to select care when using the seat heater It may cause burns Press the switch once to select High level
205. emember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e f frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling 7 system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioni
206. emind you to remove the key NOTE e The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position e With either front door open and the key in the ignition neither the power door locks nor Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will function Locking Doors With A Key There is only one external door lock cylinder which is located in the driver s door only You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward to unlock the door turn the key forward For door lock lubrication refer to Mainte nance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning the
207. en this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire 202 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illumi nates you must increase the tire pressure to the recom mended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 157 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
208. er Display No program type or Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classic Rock Cls Rock ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon 4 is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM minds If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this
209. er thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth Installation Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 FUSES Cartridge Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM The TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the e ae air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses Green ule If Equipped and mini fuses A label that identifies each component 20 Amp may be printed on the inside of the cover Refer to the 2 ATP AWD Module Battery Feed Center High 3 10 Amp Red Mounted Stop Light CHMSL Brake Switch Battery Feed 5 20 Amp Irailer Tow Yellow If Equipped graphic below for FUSES TIPM location 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ignition Off Battery Feed Draw IOD 10 20 Amp Cabin Compart 10 Amp Red Power Mirror Yellow ment Node Switch Climate CCN Controls u f 15 Amp Lt Selectable Power 30 Amp Ignition Off Blue Outlet Green Draw IOD 20 Amp Sense 1 12 Yellow Ignition Off 20 Am 30 Am p Sense 2 Ignition Off Battery Feed Draw IOD Power Seats If Cabin Compart Equipped PZEV x np scu ment Node Air Pump CCN Interior If Equipped Lighting Battery Feed Radiator Fan Rela IGN Run ACC Cigar Lighter PWR Sunroof Mod Ignition Off Draw IOD Wireless Control Clock Steering Control Module SCM
210. erating Tips 237 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 360 361 Air Conditioning System 225 229 360 Air Pressure Tires 00000000 cee 283 Duo 2a Vener eae eee cess eee tA Ene ees 53 63 Adbqs Deployment essasi oF aes Paa 64 AirDap Light 4 04545 834446544 oe au es 62 67 82 151 Airbag Maintenance oi 522440444 teray edo 66 ADAS IGS MT 56 60 63 Airbag Window Side Curtain 57 60 63 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 158 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio less 216 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 368 396 DispOsdl 2 249 4 9up94 Gag ae ee gene ee Re 370 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 262 Anti Lock Warming Light eus qus dure perser 262 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 mp peat ance CAS an ess e v 99 Seay s px FE eg 377 Pony Sls e RA VA wees EX E Sense IRR PERS 152 Auto Down Power Windows 34 Auto Unlock Doors leeren 31 Auto Up Power Windows 95 129 Automatic Dimming Mitron siess saipa e pasa 90 Automatic Door Locks less 30 31 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 156 166 400 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 229 Ne INDEX 429 Automatic Transaxle 12 243 246 374 B Pillar Location 542 i9 RARG 278 Adding PIU 21 224 29 399 9 eee ERR 375 376 398 Brake Assist System scs sue degree Mies Hw dS 26
211. eration either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS XX The wipers and washers are operated by a switch SZ on the control lever The lever is located on the right side of the steering column ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 031508787 031508788 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever Changing Wiper Speeds Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the park low speed wiper operation or to the HI position for position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they high speed wiper operation are operating The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving between cycles through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi tions make a single wiping cycle with
212. erheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at anytime the igni tion switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flu
213. ernal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate
214. esired operation 300 STARTING AND OPERATING The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses Shue eee ue eee eee eases KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 4L and 2 7L Engine All engines are designed to meet all emis S mm sion regulations and provide excellent fuel 87 economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular gasoline 800dfab having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING 3 5L Engine The 3 5L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Rey METHOD 89 800dfab7 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 symptoms try another brand of gasoline
215. ess the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink Control channels WARNINCG Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 81cb44fe HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand HomeLink Buttons held transmitters that operate devices such as garage NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu door openers motorized gates lighting or home security rity Alarm is active systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the universal transceiver Do not train th
216. ess the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3
217. f Equipped 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e When installing the Totally Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Totally Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Front Courtesy Reading Lamp 578 W5W Center Courtesy Reading Lamp 578 WSW Visor Vanity Lampe s ak vae ee me Kh 4h ede e A6220 Glove Pox EOD audae srare 9 eat aub rd e shee A6220 Shift Indicator Lamp IKLE14140 Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 579 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer fo
218. f available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Fo
219. face as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised WARNING Continued e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Qui Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a A 5 es jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a 1i LP jack NS Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Jack Warning Label Only use the jack in the positions indicated and 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the for lifting this vehicle during a tire change spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left Continued to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M NOTE The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning with two attachment points When the jack is partially them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the expanded the tension between the two attachment ground points holds the jack handle in place CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
220. fic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory isa SAFETY TIPS high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil Pn ee ne Conse wa eee ee EVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGD conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to nus Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL TENE OILS MUST NEVER BE USED e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people Transporting Passengers A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill The
221. frequently to assure that it is operating properly Turn the ignition key to the on position but do not start the vehicle The light should come on If the light does not come on have the system inspected by an authorized dealer If Equipped with severe usage such as trailer towing If this run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off This light indicates that the transmission fluid light turns on safely pull over and stop the CAUTION 27 Transmission Temperature Warning Light temperature is running hot This may occur vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 WARNING Continued operation with the Transmission Tem perature Warning Light illuminated could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components causing a fire that may result in personal injury 28 High Beam Indicator This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam 29 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped This display shows the EVIC messages when the appro priate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC for fu
222. g Gasoline Fuel 300 NS INDEX 439 OGOMCC Luo eru bbo0 4s 64 RSLINXSA See 2535 154 DID 62 154 157 Oil Change Indicator esso aacra REOS 156 166 400 Oil Change Indicator Reset 156 166 JENE 25 4 40205 a ERAT EE RENA 354 397 eon A P m 396 Change Interval duse ee areri 156 166 355 400 CHECKIN ECC 354 BDP UE asc reerp dq cew tad soe 4 oe ees a oes 354 DispOsdl orae ead eta e ne ce eeganee ea ees 357 j ac 6 aoe a E one oe 2S ee oe 357 397 Filter Disposal saas ooo st bane hae a eee ea 357 IGenncanOn LOBO tiga tances aa decease 355 Materials Added to lel Do Recommendation 355 396 viuis Pv C es 957 bo A rcm 356 396 ilis diio PN P eee eee ot 357 Oil Filter Selection 5432 rac EP RO 9 RT SX 357 Ol Pressure P Pr EEREN 152 Onboard Diagnostic System usa ap anaana 350 351 Opener Garage Door HomeLink T2 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 O ETETETT EET des SO dod EET 251 Ove count BIBIB s22 54002050 aos eg EE 92 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 423 Pan Ce Geant oaks oe Se Be eae yy Paso Alam sa geenid PRIOR es eet eases ee 24 Parking Drake S43 4x23 21 P UEIAEI EUR PURA 299 assume DIOE a e oe ne cee ina aos sor Bg al 109 Personal Serie 245644 a 9 940 93 ate RO e 11 Hu P 79 Phone Cellular X 444444 dE ee ea RAS Fus 93 Phone Hands Free Uco
223. g Flasher 327 B If Your Engine Overheats 327 O Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If Equipped 328 Bl Jacking And Tire Changing 929 Hack Location dus39 e95992 bu me 329 O Spare ire SOWA 21 444 9s topo eee was 329 O Preparations For Jacking H Jacking Instructions M Jump Starting O Preparations For Jump Start O Jump Startine Procedure 1a sacks dee neous W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M B Towing A Disabled Vehicle 341 D Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle O Towing With The Ignition Key 341 DUES LOY Osa erate eras sare e H Towing Without Power Override ee sedis temstune der Tate d Interlock Systemi lt a asiasi s 343 o Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 342 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary
224. g rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 MPEG Speci Sampling Fre secl ets B Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 MFEG I Au 48 441 32 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 TNAM 24 2205 16 96 80 64 56 48 y 40 32 24 16 8 ru ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios dio Layer 3 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a
225. g your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and J Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine except PZEV Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect t
226. gest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Continued The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoul der part of the belt to move freely with you under normal ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING Continued 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions A a 022632691 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and M 922652601 adjust the seat Pulling Out the Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e A belt that i
227. ght overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Outside Mirror Passenger Side Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the vehicle mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this passenger side mirror etat e 81315182 Illuminated Vanity Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a hands free system that allows you to use voice commands to dial a phone number stored in your cellular phone Press the Uconnect Phone button amp on the radio or steering wheel controls if equipped and follow the instructions to pair the cellular phone Refer to Uconnect M Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command
228. h mounted stop lamp 2 Twist and remove socket from the back of the lamp housing Mee Qo X ie J O 4 ler oe 4 D 4 5 4 o A a Re oq is on zz Go Q Q a oe it ing Replace the bulb and re lock ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 housing by D 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME FLUID CAPACITIES 16 9 Gallons 18 5 Gallons Engine Oil with Filter 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 5 Quarts 5 5 Quarts 5 5 Quarts 2 4L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 2 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent z Yeac 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 116 Quarts 1 Liters Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 64 Liters 70 Liters 4 4 Liters 5 2 Liters 5 2 Liters 7 7 Quarts 7 3 Liters 9 8 Quarts 9 3 Liters ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Parine Cacia MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy 5 brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 2 4L and 2 7L Engines Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 3 5L Engine Chrysler M
229. h opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 CAUTION When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without us
230. he floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix He Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode 10 minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE
231. he front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and J Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance
232. he maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 276 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 es STA
233. he multi function lever must be rotated to the off position after the ignition switch is turned OFF Only the headlights will illuminate during this time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signal Control NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 sec
234. hese conditions using the 3 range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ee DRIVE 3 Four Speed Transmission This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear The trans mission will operate normally in first and second gear Shifts into third may be delayed to provide second gear operation at higher speeds The 3 range should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up LOW Four Speed Transmission This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections CAUTION If the transmission operating temperature exceeds acceptable limits the vehicle computer will override OVERDRIVE and 3 DRIVE range by changing shift points This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating Reset Mode Electronic Transmission The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into sec ond gear The transmission remains in second gear third gea
235. hicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pres sures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in pla
236. icle has come to between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte a complete stop grated Power Module Fuse Box on the driver s side of amp Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the the vehicle vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL Remember to disconnect the cord before driving into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution STARTING AND OPERATING 247 WARNING e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal 051010709 Continued Shift Lever NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK 248 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the
237. ided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid Sentry Keys by performing the following proce dure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehic
238. ied on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test flammable and can explode injuring you Other tUHON unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause CAUTION the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAI
239. if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and on short trips Someone on the road may bea poor driver reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or and cause a collision that includes you This can happen being thrown out far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they WARNING can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown using a seat belt properly from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should these areas are more likely to be seriously injured be belted at all times or killed Lap Shoulder Belts Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with belts are designed to go around the large bones of lap shoulder belts your body These are the stron
240. ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave children un attended inside a vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to any other switch position ACC ON or START engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed NOTE If a malfunction occurs the transmission will not shift out of park Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system However there is an override system that allows you to shift out of PARK in case of loss of power To activate the override system e Firmly apply the parking brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 e Insert the ignition key and rotate it to the ON position e Remove the cup holder liner e Insert a key
241. ill be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Ucon
242. ill sound intermittently and the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System 1 Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door lock switch one door must be open or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter doors can be open or closed and close all doors NOTE The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm NOTE e During the 16 second arming period if a door is opened or the ignition switch is turned ON the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm e Once armed the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the unlock
243. ine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and doing so will cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Filler Cap Message If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off VEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver s door 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The lab
244. ing the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of IC an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors emissions engine and automatic trans mission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
245. ing the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint Sys tem for typical installation instructions Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles 022632699 Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Be
246. ished by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 426 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest
247. iver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg Occupants Combined weight of TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo from Tire Pla
248. key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the transaxle remains in NEUTRAL Towing Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method However if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available a wheel lift towing vehicle may be used Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxle damage can result If rear towing is the only alternative a front end dolly must be used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the limitations described in this section Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxle damage can result If rear towing is the only alternative a front end dolly must be used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 343 Towing Without Power Override Transaxle Interlock System Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the v
249. key out the word deck will display until the trunk is closed On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC p equipped vehicles the words Trunk Ajar will display TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Trunk Internal Emergency Release As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism 022310660 Trunk Internal Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems The following safety features are standard on all vehicles e Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatabl
250. l for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor Spare Tire and Jack Stowage in the trunk 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Preparations For Jacking 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas In AM TEN ilii sl j i il n 4 1 it n i L hong ii 4 aet TA i i WARNINCG Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the PHI Hi iet Hj HI ien IET et vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle the road to avoid the danger of being hit when while the vehicle is being jacked operating the jack or changing the wheel Jacking Instructions 2 Set the parking brake WARNING 3 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transaxle ar REVERSE manual mansando Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your 4 Turn OFF the ignition vehicle 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Continued a WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 331 WARNING Continued Always park on a firm level sur
251. late in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy
252. le e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings I V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will ref illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 81826bed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addi
253. le Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an autho rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unautho rized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes For the first three minutes the horn w
254. leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the ignition key in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro
255. ll 3 illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear Video Console window defroster only when the engine is operating Refer to Video Entertainment System If Equipped in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further CAUTION information Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Continued 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window Chill Zone CHILL ZONE BEVERAGE COOLER STORAGE The Chill Zone compartment will hold up to four COMPARTMENT standing 12 oz 3 L beverage cans The Chill Zone The Chill Zone Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment compartment is also equipped with a soft molded liner is located in the top of the instrument panel on the that is removable for easy cleaning
256. ls stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you ru commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System VES in cludes the following components for rear seat entertain ment e A diagonal 7 in 17 8 cm Liquid Crystal Display LCD screen integrated into the center console armrest The screen features brightness control for optimum day time and nighttime viewing 8199815e Opening the Rear Seat VES e The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest to allow the rear seat passenger s to view the display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 pom e A battery powered infrared remote control snaps into a molded compartment in the center console armrest upper storage bin 8199818b VES Video Screen NOTE Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been raised to its viewing position 81abfb61 VES Remote Control e The radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rea
257. lt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensio
258. ly Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly 2 e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash electronically controlled safety systems including the statistics children are safer when properly restrained in airbag system the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded e Vehicle speed e Engine RPM Brake switch status Pedal position And other configuration parameters depending on vehicle Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could
259. ly be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e RES is asingle CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Pr
260. met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon S Spe EVER E oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious s Hood aoci injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Trunk closed away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button e Battery at an acceptable charge level and x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec e RKE PANIC button not pressed onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle e Ignition key removed from ignition switch 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e f an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later e For security power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start se
261. n cause loss of Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tr
262. n memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player
263. n one year old WARNING Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child s back is against the seatback then the child should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A r
264. n posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity 28
265. nate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade
266. nature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and L Rotate tires replace if necessary J Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped except PZEV Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Adjust parking brake on vehicles damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary equipped with four wheel disc brakes M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If usin
267. nd the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of fol
268. nect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will di
269. ners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact
270. ng keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser voir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However lo
271. ng the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may on and off and the Illuminated Entry system if apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate equipped will turn on 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a 2 The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency RF noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters j amp a 7 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details 81182c72 Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers
272. nnect 93 Placard Tire and Loading Information 278 Be ug g 2za egmhEEggNg Power Door LOCKS coups uobeete s dope Pm sone Vade 30 MUTO Serrone surion ed I eee a eae MI A 90 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 130 Peds 655 4495 6655 ned ee Ga a ee ee he eh 99 DICCTING rr os 258 259 NOOL ase ra wed oboe GERI RE EUR es aoe 127 luu P D T 99 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 92 Preparation tor Jacking isa aaa paa ai a aa 330 Pretensioners Ded Delis 2322 9244 4 PARRA eee eee EEA 47 Programmable Electronic Features 171 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 2o mde ios ncs 25 Radial Piy DOS a u e sooo 9 9o XR RUE eee s 285 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 369 Radio Operati n 2259 9 3b d 66d od0R pisci ii 224 Radio Remote Controls lesen 222 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 215 Rear C upholdef doceas gag 4 cage geben a do m d 134 Kea peat Pole seara e wx de ee nanai 103 104 Rear Window Defroster less 139 Rear Window Features sess 139 Rearview Mirrors ee eee eee 89 Recreational TOWING amp o2 es 0084b4 e2 e8e 324 Reformulated Gasoline ls 301 Keicetant caracas ucu cp dC ers RURU RR pee See ea IUE 361 Reminder Seat Belt 44322 2909 eon ws ol Remote Control Door Locks 4 4 us iae cade bead E e to e peto do 20 Secu Al Ate sos Y eR
273. nother selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third
274. ntrol under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of this manual Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly
275. o be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channe
276. o listen to the Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting e Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track three times to listen to the third track e Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next and so forth listenable station down from the current setting e Press the button located in the center of the switch to P the button in th ter of th itch to t t aa a a MM a change to the next preset that you have programmed the next preset that you have programmed 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew
277. o the upright position mm be sure the seatback is latched 035107278 Folding Rear Seats 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING The rear cargo area of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with H 035107277 J cupholders ST Folding Rear Seat Armrest ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Lift the secondary latch located under the front edge To open the hood two latches must be released of the hood near the center and raise the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 031307188 Hood Safety Catch E 1 CJ M _ 031307190 Hood Release Lever 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open CAUTION position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the left underside of the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to T close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the ho
278. od is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 81 NS LIGHTS Hood Prop Rod Hole Location Before closing the hood make sure to stow the prop ro in its proper location d Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming Headlights and Parking Lights and turn signals The multifunction lever is located on Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent the left side of the steering column for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight operation 031407547 031407548 Multifunction Lever Headlight Switch 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Headlights If Equipped Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent AUTO will activate the automatic headlight system 031407553 Headlight Switch With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on and turn off based on the surrounding light levels Headlight Time Delay There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle lights for 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight delay t
279. of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed
280. of the seat To recline A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort lean forward slightly before lifting the lever then lean for petite as well as tall drivers A lever with a ratcheting back to the desired position and release the lever Lean mechanism located on the outboard side of the seat forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its raises and lowers it Total travel is 2 2 in 56 mm normal position 030907272 i Seatback Adjustment 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support The control lever is located on the outboard side of the driver s seatback Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Lumbar Support ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Adjusting Active Head Restraints To raise the head re
281. om the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code oystem 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light proceed to Step 5 Pro gramming A Rolling Code System 5 Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or T
282. on properly if modi Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso ries may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system
283. on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Manual Heating and Air Conditioning Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O 045607577 OFF position There are four blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off 045607574 position Manual Temperature Control The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Temperature Control Rotate this control to
284. onds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever 031407550 Front Fog Light Control NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime Running Lights DRL and operate at lower intensity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is released and the shift lever is in any position except PARK NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opene
285. oning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and J Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Sig
286. ons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Opening a door with the system activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Flash Lights With Lock The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 3 Test the featur
287. or title Ze Vehicle Identification Number EE INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS un Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 12 O Ignition Key Removal i424 a aa dn 12 O Key In Ignition Reminder 14 B Locking Doors With A Key 14 NM Sentry Key oc e542 eeeheeeeen ee nnees 14 El Replacement Keys 2 424 2c T Rex ds 15 XO Customer Key Programming 16 O General Information 222 c9 be rege 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped o Rearming The System o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System Bi illuminated Entry If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped D To Unlock The Doors D To Lock The Doors 0 To Unlatch The Trunk 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EME D Remote Open Window Feature IF EOUIDDOG 4442 dote bare Ard een eens PUER 24 o Using The Panic Alarm a da e dea exi 24 O Programming Additional Transmitters 25 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 O General Information 26 ll Remote Start System If Equipped 26 0 How To Use Remote Start 4 lt e2464225 ahy 6 4 4 27 W Door LOCKS 442 ay aeg bees 29 O M
288. orted MP3 Pro files are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name i
289. ot amp Stain Remover or equivalent ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other
290. ot been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant coolant antifreeze is not recommended antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the Adding Coolant specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine possible coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance Continued intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower qualit
291. ou want the window to stop NOTE ANTI PINCH PROTECTION e f the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING When the window is almost closed there is no anti pinch protection To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing Reset Auto Up Any time the vehicle battery goes dead the Auto Up function will be disabled To reactivate the Auto Up feature pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCK button To enable the window controls press the window control button again 2 021932688 Window Lockout Switch Using the Remote Open Windows Feature with Key Fob If Equipped To lower the front windows using the RKE transmitter perform th
292. our OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WAR
293. our vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons includ
294. p and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels such as steel wool or scouring powder which will completely with clear water scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi e Jf insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug paint and decals and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and to protect your paint finish Take care never to near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once scratch the paint a month e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear finish and open ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility
295. paet opare Iie 2x exog s rpRR EAE 265 MEF uel Requirements 2 22229 0 RES RS 300 Eire SOI s scs TEEST TETEE Ep PE E 286 O24LAnd27LENGDE ze sce v o eee pct 300 O read Wear Indicatots 12 eben 287 A Mani P 300 DEG qr THIS uu us sckauRS PNE Sg ue 288 O Reformulated Gasoline 301 O Replacement Nites as erener rits we d dede s 288 oO Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 301 W Tire Chains a ee hea eee kits 289 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 302 B Snow Tires 0 ee ee ee 290 0 MMT In Gasoline Mi Tire Rotation Recommendations 290 El Materials Added To Fuel os 20004 xa 303 Mi Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 20 O Fuel System Cautions isss educere m nma 303 Apace DYE eap reee er ey ayneaeared 294 O Carbon Monoxide Warnings 304 O Premium System If Equipped 296 W Flexible Fuel 2 7L Only If Equipped 305 O General Information oers joe VPE araar 299 O E85 General Miormation se v douce soe m e sessi 305 O Ethanol Fuel E85 uiu dem em 307 242 STARTING AND OPERATINC xe A Fuel Kequirements x33 eve RRSRa RE 307 O Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E85 And Gasoline Vehicles 308 ESI 34 oa S999 eee eee ok ew Gee 308 ECHOS RANGE ics euge dedi meee eee os 308 OC Replacement Parts amp saesa adn th m aes 309 E MAIDEGRADEE oc abren t ost Soe ee eS 309 IM Adding Fuel uuu pm ropa EXER v 309 O PFuel Filer Cap Gas Cap 4a
296. panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Differ ent airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Inflator Units If Equipped The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inf
297. passenger side A recessed latch at the front releases the bin door and swings up for easy access ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Inside the Chill Zone is a vent which when opened The glove compartment is located beneath the Chill allows either air conditioned or fresh air to flow into the Zone storage compartment The glove compartment Chill Zone compartment Depending on ambient tem door swings downward for easy access perature and A C setting the compartment can keep um beverages cool For Chill Zone to operate properly door must remain closed while vehicle is in operation Shut off the Chill Zone when not in use by closing the vent inside This will prevent cool air from entering the passenger compartment when in heat mode NOTE The use of the Chill Zone storage compartment is for nonperishable beverages only Glove Compartment Access UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS W Instrument Panel Features 147 B Instrument Cluster Base 148 Bl Instrument Cluster Premium 149 Bl Instrument Cluster Descriptions 150 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Ili sro bdo rers o Nm 164 D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC colpi Rv Pr 165 B Oil Change Required If Equipped 166 El tip GUNCHOUS auunads m ves op bon ra nii 167 D Compass Display O Personal Settings Customer Programmable F
298. ported on the disc if equipped 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc These selections can only be made while playing a DVD VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR
299. quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Mix mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side window fogging be comes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle win dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DE
300. quence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the Remote Start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then within 15 minutes insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may c
301. r seat passengers e Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks are rocker type switches with a pushbutton in the center on the rear of the center console enable of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access the monitor to display video directly the switches from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player 1 Video in yellow 2 Left audio in white 3 Right audio in red NOTE Refer to the Uconnect Multimedia section of Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel The left and right controls ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Right Hand Switch Functions Left Hand Switch Functions for Media i e CD i ration e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume Operatio P the t f th itch to listen to th t e Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume EA Ee See ee a a Ug st e Press the button in the center of the switch to change i Press th f the switch ither to li modes i e AM FM etc e Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or t
302. r comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and then turn the air t TY conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 646 oS the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near rf If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and 2 In very cold weather pim if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS aM Starting Procedures uus emos emer m 243 W Automatic Transmission 246 O Automatic Transmission i424 m aes 243 H Key Ignition Park Interlock ANormal State wy omar Sack HOU do oe 243 O Brake Transmission Interlock System O Extreme Cold Weather O Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock Below 20 F Of 29 6 iussa rep ae 244 DVM P L HD ee es 249 ELIT Engine Fals TOD ac aa ave ae d are x 244 D Four Speed Six Speed Automatic ELOUTGF State 4a oes Bobs ee nee n ee eed 245 ea i Seay moe rer a ll Engine Block H
303. r replacement ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Low Beam Headlamp a 0 404449 64444 H11 High Beam Headlamp 9005 Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Lamp 3757A Front Fog Lampo e sas eu E n EC I od d PSX24W Center High Mounted Stop CHMSL Lamp os aca tee 3 279 irinn d W16W 921 Rear Iau Stop Lamp iuo m Re Pros 3157 Rear Turn Signal Lamp eve emere 9157 Backup Lamp eoa o q eeedo8 ce t5 hb 6044 1d 99 9157 License JH OE Ds a rea eR Coh ICE RR OR a hen da d ees W5W Front Position Lamp s eec d ries prd 4 W5W BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp 1 Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the headlamp NOTE It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter housing and position the totally integrated power module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp on the driver s side of the vehicle 2 Reach into engine compartment and from behind the lamp assembly and grasp the connector 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Rotate bulb and connector 1 4 turn and pull outward 4 Pull the bulb out of the socket and cae E the PD from assembly 81911575 5 If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface CAUTION clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 6 Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate clockwise 1 4 turn to secure Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life ee MAINTAINING
304. r the radio Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Refer to the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to Video Entertainment System VES in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee DTSTM DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM
305. r with a six speed automatic despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 In the event that the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift into PARK 3 Turn the ignition OFF and restart the engine 4 Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset dealer service is required AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation By placing the shift lever one shift level below the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the shift lever to
306. raining button 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor It is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at
307. re to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain e The catalytic converter requires the use of un carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know B
308. rect cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings an accident resulting in serio
309. restraint secure try a different seating position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat Make sure that e The child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traf
310. results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mannet which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied During operation
311. ring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level Four Cylinder Engines the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle Six Cylinder Engines the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the COLD and FULL range on the bottle when the engine is cold ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When addi tional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To R
312. rnings including Low Tire Door Ajar and Trunk Ajar will only display in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for spe cific messages LoW TirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three cycles HOTOIL When this message is displayed there is a transmission over temperature condition When this condition occurs the HOTOIL message will be displayed in the odom eter along with a chime NOTE When this message is displayed bring the vehicle to a stop and idle the engine in park until the message clears Raising the idle of the engine slightly will help speed up the cooling gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change in the evaporative system or the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the words gASCAP will display in the odometer display area If this occurs 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn off the gASCAP message Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash
313. romptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle FLEXIBLE FUEL 2 7L ONLY IF EQUIPPED E85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE The 2 7L engine is now rated for E85 Ethanol use EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES Only oa vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can operate on Only vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can So operate on E85 81ae46a9 81ae46ab E85 Fuel Cap E85 Badge ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Ethanol Fuel E85 E85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel
314. rough idle and increased brake pedal effort and your vehicle may require towing Immediate service is required The light will come on when the ignition switch is first turned on and remain on approximately 15 seconds as a bulb check This is normal If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 18 Position Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park ZpQ lights or headlights are turned on 19 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con 5 trol system ESC has been turned off by the OFF driver 20 Turn Signal Indicators The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal when using the turn signal lever 21 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the alarm system is arming The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed The light will stop flashing when the vehicle is disarmed 22 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activationl Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running
315. rther information 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER The EVIC consists of the following EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the e Vehicle information warning message displays instrument cluster e System status e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass heading display N 5 E W NE NW SE SW e Outside temperature display F or C e Trip computer functions e Audio mode displays 12 preset Radio Stations or CD Title and Track number when playing FM 101 1 10 e Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS displays if equipped 041032674 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel switch bank located below the climate controls Press and release the MENU button to advance MENU the display to Trip Functions or Personal set tings or to return to the default System status MENU display Button Press and release the STEP button to advance STEP ihe display through the various Trip Functions V sor Personal settings STEP Button UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Press and release the COMPASS button to display the compass heading and the out side temperature COMPASS Button Press and release the RESET button to accept a gt
316. rthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is shown in the following diagram EJ E C E ce 055707139 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System IPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 291 The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driv
317. s has power available only when the ignition is ON This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position Instrument Panel Power Outlet ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 The center console power outlet is powered directly from NOTE the battery power available at all times Items plugged e Io ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and into this power outlet may discharge the battery and or element must be used prevent the engine from starting e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Console Interior 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw An optional ash receiver is available from your autho power from the vehicle s battery even when notin rized dealer and will fit in the center console front use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if cupholder plugged in long enough the vehicle s batter
318. s been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the Trip Odometer button To reset a trip odom eter display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets ap proximately two seconds Refer to Irip Odometer But ton for additional information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the odometer will display the following messages sno CPCC ee Door Ajar onn P PETIT Trunk Ajar LOW IUE save Rho REESE E Low Tire Pressure CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required pASCAD Sx xd heb ake RE Fuel Cap Fault HOTOIL 22 22 Transmission Oil Temperature Exceeds Safe Threshold NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC then all wa
319. s buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly ESA EI LI huy 022632692 Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt 2 vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of int
320. s of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and stow it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Front Airbag Components bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The 1 Driver Advanced Front Airbag passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the LS aw e Front Airbag instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags 022632696 54 THINGS TO
321. s old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be tween
322. screwdriver or finger into the front hole then push and hold the manual override release lever forward e While holding the release lever forward move the shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL Release the override NOTE If this occurs even if the override is successful it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ON position and the brake pedal is applied NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Four Speed Six Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e Never
323. seratane rimeni Tnm 300 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt ses 45 iBotrus Cate A 380 VanIb WHITOIS 634 qud de dre ipe E OPES E tata a4 92 Variance COM Pace 4424455 6463 pneu xd e 170 Vehicle Certification Label Lis 311 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading iss sursescd toes d rrapi 2 9 311 313 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage ees seas 9 eiea mo Rs 235 388 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System eias ae doce esed 220 Viscosity Engine Ol iua esas de R3 taiii 356 Voice Recognition System VR ae ine ys 93 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 150 Warnings and Cautions a aco ers aw os si 6 Warranty Information sssusa aneneen 422 Washer Adding Fid sessy siaaa dee e d 364 Washers Windshield 112 115 364 Washing VeWIClet lt 5 5635439555 C4 ee ERE T SU 378 Water Driving Through Bm CsSCSC CSCis Wheel and Wheel Trim less 379 Windshield Washers 112 115 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care sss 379 Od r PUT 364 Vind PUNCHING pedi sopa dde Red 36 129 Windshield Wiper Blades eee Ren 363 Window Fogging 23 66 ac ips Repo re s ec o 296 Windshield Wipers eec aveo dedit 6 ntn os 112 nop PT Hr DITTTITTT 33 Wiper Blade Replacement 3 3 569 ache a t oa 363 FOWED D
324. shed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Selection Of Coolant CAUTION Continued Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main Do not use water alone or alcohol based EHE coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi taining Your Vehicle for further information ce tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they CAUTION may not be compatible with the engine coolant e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has n
325. signed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Automatic Locking Mode for further informa tion A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoul der and lap belt on the child restraint The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing the webbing to retract As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button and allow the webbing to retract into the retractor In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child
326. sion fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the four speed automatic transmission fluid level before towing The AutoStick six speed trans mission is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked See your authorized dealership service center for assistance Electronic Speed Control If Equipped e Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed 324 STARTING AND OPERATING xe e Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to RECREATIONAL TOWING maximize fuel efficiency BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Cooling System Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle To reduce potential for engine and transmission over Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground heating take the following actions CAUTION e City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drive mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed train will result e Highway Driving Reduce speed NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground e Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS W Hazard Warnin
327. splay Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five Program Type 16 Digit Character Display seconds will allow the program format type to be se News EN lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information E 52 ies Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following BE UH Program Type 16 Digit Character Display
328. splayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6
329. ssage will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Flapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press and release the STEP button to advance the display through the Trip Functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate in the EVIC display This ECO message will appear when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset
330. stem WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If Equipped During sustained high speed driving or trailer tow up long grades on a hot day the engine oil temperature may become too hot If this happens the HOTOIL message flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph 85 km h until the engine oil temperature is reduced NOTE The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of 53 mph 85 km h You may of course reduce your vehicle speed further if needed en WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 329 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor WARNING in the trunk e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The Spare Tire Removal vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down could be crushed Never put any part of your body go a E under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a too
331. straint pull upward on the head Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in restraint on some models you may need to press the the event of a rear impact The Active Head Restraint push button To lower the head restraint press the push should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is button located at the base of the head restraint and push located above the top of your ear downward on the head restraint dem P E 030907652 Adjusted Head Restraint Push Button 030907490 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head IL 030907533 Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer 022607494 PP Active Head Restraint Normal Position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re WARNING Continued straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things to Know Before Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Starting Your
332. t Women sess e oed O Seat Belt Extender i3 uses eese en aes 52 4 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make D Supplemental Restraint System SRS Outside fue Veliel amp 6 42 4644 ou ede cirera 84 DUID38S wosuqqusess Cus TRE IPAE ETE E pu S 59 D Airbag System Components 54 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 020210511 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transaxle Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the D Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE e f you try to remove the key before you place the shift switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes lever in PARK the key may become trapped tempo rarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
333. tain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction ie pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidential
334. ted by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds 5 continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the 055007576 speed 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 288 STARTING AND OPERATING M Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and cor
335. teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those do
336. tem as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK 260 STARTING AND OPERATING M The parking brake lever is located in the center console When the parking brake is applied with the ignition To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up cluster will illuminate slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows
337. ter 3 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Automatic Transmission Dipstick Four Speed Only 10 Engine Oil Fill 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 5L 070907578 6 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Engine Oil Fill 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 3 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as maintaining engine emissions well within current government regu lations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist an authorized service technician in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the
338. ter mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and com pares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Off Indicator Light The ESC Off Indicator Light located in the 5 instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the OFF tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Off Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Off Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING e The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions Continued 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped v
339. ternal lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located in the engine compartment Be su
340. tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met Power Sunroof Switch 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Sunroof Operation Opening Sunroof Manually Press the switch rearward and hold and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically During this opera tion any release of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open a
341. th you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 420 IF Y
342. thin the first 2 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt partially each time when unbuckling 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bone
343. tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer ee IFYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 423 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These compr
344. tion the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes 298 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure
345. to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transaxle in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn the air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range After appropriate action has been taken if the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling sy
346. tton 4 Radio 8 Hazard Switch 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE CRUISE d D c uu p 4 040407598 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 040307599 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy stop and go traffic or when towing a trailer If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark turn the engine off immediately and call for service There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioning is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
347. ture can be power door locks if enabled or disabled as follows 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle abled Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 2 The transmission shift lever was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK s Porvehiceenai equiped vithdhs FIC penormine 4 The driver door is opened the following procedure 5 The doors were not previously unlocked and 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors The Child Protection Door Locks Rear Doors are located inside the rear edge of the door Insert the tip of the ignition key or similar flat bladed object into the lock and rotat
348. u can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position and you must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start Four Speed Transmission turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure For vehicles equipped with Tip Start Six Speed Trans mission turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter 244 STARTING AND OPERATING Se motor will continue to run and it will disengage auto matically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 sec onds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNINCG e Never pour fuel or other flammabl
349. ually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 022632697 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label If Equipped Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags provide en hanced protection to help protect an occupant during a ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys only the right airbag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags may offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC airbags deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Location NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur
350. ued e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts e The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dan gerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision CONSOLE FEATURES The center console armrest slides forward from design position to provide added user comfort Two cupholders each of which can accommodate large beverage contain ers A one piece cupholder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for cleaning The cupholders will also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz 5 L bottles An optional removable ashtray may be located in the one cupholder UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Console Features 81974143 di etelage EIS l Storage Console Detail Lifting a latch
351. umps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop 260 STARTING AND OPERATING See e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e anda slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari ous driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle co
352. us injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom capacity other than what was originally equipped mended on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued 290 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during Winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially wo
353. ushed all the way to the floor If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Ex treme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up 246 STARTING AND OPERATING xe ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood e Shift into PARK only after the veh
354. utomatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manually To close the sunroof from an open or vent position press and hold the switch forward The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically Release the switch to stop sun roof travel at any point ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully then stop automatically This is called Ex press Close During Express Close operation any move ment of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Auto Sunroof Express With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped During express closing anytime an obstacle that restricts glass movement is detected the motor will stop and reverse travel to avoid pinching the object Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in
355. ux xe E YS AER PX YEARS 136 Fluid Capacities 4 644646 6505549455855 erg e 396 Pc Leaks 444424448645 2455 6648 999 25 84 434 INDEX M Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 375 376 Brake E E E ET 372 398 Cooling System 4444 254ndn Ghar S OR d E 367 PAE Ol so wea qd x educ xa e ra E e 354 POWer DIGO I IB x sesso toi enar tniii os 259 398 Pits CR SERE RE oe eee hee a E es 397 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 397 POP LION Code ea ype eg ru Pe ey a seg 110 159 391 Folding Kear Seal as acte atero one eA 103 104 Preemo A Duck Vehicle dons dae aee e sp 29 aues 209 Duel 2 222223 999 3 22 4 SETUP SAP TRES TA 300 Denn A 309 P LO SR 4 oh ode bud ate eo Sheet couse 303 Clean Air 2 ee ee ee 301 ECOL ac ee aoc ee oe veo oe eee ee 301 Filler Cap Gas Cap aa nekta ere ed 150 309 Filler Door Gas Cap exse c oko CERE SS 150 ern AM C DD 300 eco Pm 150 Lights ossa ecu as a RN PROP Ene E dub ind 151 Materials Added uu dea ydo he er bsc ea 303 DOL e scxtsurlanbst be oes ao aca eat a bd d 301 Octane RAUNG amp soe qud d ardet desc EROR 300 397 INCOMELEINICHES ueace don ob cece Rite ar irs 300 396 Tank Capaclly 24 dok aet 4o dod erra P 4G tiiat 396 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel System CANON ass cde oec Bow eens 310 dini or Cr TET 309 LUSER 2201 9 tae apee ee eye cee eee OR Been 383 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 121 Gas
356. value in the graphic display 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause und
357. vernmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee Engine Air Cleaner Filter WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your v
358. w fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Automatic Transmission This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard The automatic transmission and differential assembly are or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake contained within a single housing failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake
359. witch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type t
360. y are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not functi
361. y contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehi
362. y water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 3 0 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e The warming words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requi
363. y will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Ash Receiver ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 CUPHOLDERS M There are two cupholders located in the center console For vehicles equipped with the heated and cooled for the front passengers cupholder locate the cup holder ash receiver in the forward cupholder The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter You may use the power outlet located in the instrument panel below the climate control knobs or in the bottom of the console compartment for this cigar lighter Front Cupholders 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Seat Bottle Holder WARNING There are built in bottle holders located in both rear door trim panels If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burn ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury STORAGE Driver s Side Sunglass Holder If Equipped
364. you and the door 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNINCG e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Continued Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC airbags if equipped Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags if equipped

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

S4K2U-5C Industrial On-line UPS 230 V, 1000 VA  AAIU Formal Report No  advertencia  DeltaVision Office Template Tools  AG-205 取扱説明書  Mode d`emploi  The Greater the Torque, the Falk™ TRUE HOLD® Low Speed  Bolens 248-604A Owner's Manual  Product information  Pegasus FW0B8204PBV Instructions / Assembly  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file